WO2023050910A1 - Icon display method, intelligent terminal and storage medium - Google Patents

Icon display method, intelligent terminal and storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023050910A1
WO2023050910A1 PCT/CN2022/100096 CN2022100096W WO2023050910A1 WO 2023050910 A1 WO2023050910 A1 WO 2023050910A1 CN 2022100096 W CN2022100096 W CN 2022100096W WO 2023050910 A1 WO2023050910 A1 WO 2023050910A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
icon
target
area
mode
display
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/100096
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
张建静
Original Assignee
深圳传音控股股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202111144916.0A external-priority patent/CN113867586A/en
Priority claimed from CN202111156522.7A external-priority patent/CN113885752A/en
Priority claimed from CN202111147514.6A external-priority patent/CN113835586A/en
Application filed by 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 filed Critical 深圳传音控股股份有限公司
Publication of WO2023050910A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023050910A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of electronic technology, in particular to an icon display method, an intelligent terminal and a storage medium.
  • the user wants to display the icons in the icon area, he usually expands the icon area to display the icons in the icon area, resulting in a monotonous display mode of the icons in the icon area. Based on this, how to display icons in the icon area in a variety or interesting manner has become an urgent problem that affects user experience.
  • the present application provides an icon display method, an intelligent terminal and a storage medium. If the target scene modes are different, at least one icon in the target icon area can be displayed in a different scene interface, so that the target The icons in the icon area are displayed in a variety or interesting manner.
  • the present application provides a method for displaying icons, the method comprising:
  • the icon display method of the present application is applied to a smart terminal.
  • at least one icon in the target icon area can be displayed in the scene-based interface, if the target scene modes are different, then at least one icon in the target icon area can be displayed in different scene-based interfaces, so as to The icons in the target icon area are displayed in variety or interest.
  • the present application also provides a method for processing icons, the method including:
  • the target display mode is the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located or the target theme mode of the smart terminal;
  • Icons in the target icon area are processed according to the target display mode.
  • the icon processing method of the present application is applied to a smart terminal.
  • the target display mode can be determined. If the target display modes are different, the icons in the target icon area can be processed differently according to different target display modes, so that the icons in the target icon area can be managed and managed in a variety of ways. operate.
  • the present application also provides an icon processing method, the method comprising:
  • the icon processing method of the present application is applied to a smart terminal.
  • the target icon area can be displayed according to the target display mode. If the target display modes are different, then the target icon area can be displayed according to different target display modes, so as to achieve a variety or interesting display of the target icon area. show.
  • the present application also provides an intelligent terminal, including: a memory and a processor, wherein a computer program is stored in the memory, and when the computer program is executed by the processor, the steps of any one of the above methods are implemented.
  • the present application also provides a computer storage medium, the storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of any one of the above methods are realized.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is a system architecture diagram of a communication network provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of an icon display method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 4a is a schematic diagram of an icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 4b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 4c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 4d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 4e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a method for processing icons provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 6a is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 6b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 6c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 6d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 6e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 6f is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 6g is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of an icon processing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 8a is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 8b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 8c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 8d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • first, second, third, etc. may be used herein to describe various information, the information should not be limited to these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish information of the same type from one another. For example, without departing from the scope of this document, first information may also be called second information, and similarly, second information may also be called first information.
  • first information may also be called second information, and similarly, second information may also be called first information.
  • second information may also be called first information.
  • the word “if” as used herein may be interpreted as “at” or “when” or “in response to a determination.”
  • the singular forms "a”, “an” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context indicates otherwise.
  • A, B, C means “any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C
  • A, B or C or "A, B and/or C” means "any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C”. Exceptions to this definition will only arise when combinations of elements, functions, steps or operations are inherently mutually exclusive in some way.
  • the words “if”, “if” as used herein may be interpreted as “at” or “when” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting”.
  • the phrases “if determined” or “if detected (the stated condition or event)” could be interpreted as “when determined” or “in response to the determination” or “when detected (the stated condition or event) )” or “in response to detection of (a stated condition or event)”.
  • step codes such as S10 and S20 are used, the purpose of which is to express the corresponding content more clearly and concisely, and does not constitute a substantive limitation on the order.
  • S20 will be executed first, followed by S10, etc., but these should be within the scope of protection of this application.
  • the icon area management method herein can be applied to smart terminals, and smart terminals can be implemented in various forms.
  • the smart terminals described in this application may include mobile phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, palmtop computers, personal digital assistants (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), portable media players (Portable Media Player, PMP), navigation devices, Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers, and fixed terminals such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • PMP portable media players
  • Navigation devices Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers
  • Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers
  • fixed terminals such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
  • a mobile terminal will be taken as an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that, in addition to elements specially used for mobile purposes, the configurations according to the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to fixed-type terminals.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application.
  • the mobile terminal 100 may include: an RF (Radio Frequency, radio frequency) unit 101, a WiFi module 102, an audio output unit 103, an A /V (audio/video) input unit 104, sensor 105, display unit 106, user input unit 107, interface unit 108, memory 109, processor 110, and power supply 111 and other components.
  • RF Radio Frequency, radio frequency
  • the radio frequency unit 101 can be used for sending and receiving information or receiving and sending signals during a call. Specifically, after receiving the downlink information of the base station, it is processed by the processor 110; in addition, the uplink data is sent to the base station.
  • the radio frequency unit 101 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, and the like.
  • the radio frequency unit 101 can also communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication.
  • the above wireless communication can use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to GSM (Global System of Mobile communication, Global System for Mobile Communications), GPRS (General Packet Radio Service, General Packet Radio Service), CDMA2000 (Code Division Multiple Access 2000 , Code Division Multiple Access 2000), WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access), TD-SCDMA (Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), FDD-LTE (Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, frequency division duplex long-term evolution), TDD-LTE (Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, time-division duplex long-term evolution) and 5G, etc.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication, Global System for Mobile Communications
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • CDMA2000 Code Division Multiple Access 2000
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • TD-SCDMA Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, Time Division Synchro
  • WiFi is a short-distance wireless transmission technology.
  • the mobile terminal can help users send and receive emails, browse web pages, and access streaming media through the WiFi module 102, which provides users with wireless broadband Internet access.
  • Fig. 1 shows the WiFi module 102, it can be understood that it does not belong to the essential composition of the mobile terminal, and can be completely omitted according to needs within the scope of not changing the essence of the application.
  • the audio output unit 103 can store the audio received by the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 or in the memory 109 when the mobile terminal 100 is in a call signal receiving mode, a call mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, a broadcast receiving mode, or the like.
  • the audio data is converted into an audio signal and output as sound.
  • the audio output unit 103 can also provide audio output related to a specific function performed by the mobile terminal 100 (eg, call signal reception sound, message reception sound, etc.).
  • the audio output unit 103 may include a speaker, a buzzer, and the like.
  • the A/V input unit 104 is used to receive audio or video signals.
  • the A/V input unit 104 may include a graphics processing unit (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU) 1041 and a microphone 1042, and the graphics processing unit 1041 is used for still pictures or The image data of the video is processed.
  • the processed image frames may be displayed on the display unit 106 .
  • the image frames processed by the graphics processor 1041 may be stored in the memory 109 (or other storage media) or sent via the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 .
  • the microphone 1042 can receive sound (audio data) via the microphone 1042 in a phone call mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, and the like operating modes, and can process such sound as audio data.
  • the processed audio (voice) data can be converted into a format transmittable to a mobile communication base station via the radio frequency unit 101 for output in case of a phone call mode.
  • the microphone 1042 may implement various types of noise cancellation (or suppression) algorithms to cancel (or suppress) noise or interference generated in the process of receiving and transmitting audio signals.
  • the mobile terminal 100 also includes at least one sensor 105, such as a light sensor, a motion sensor, and other sensors.
  • the light sensor includes an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor.
  • the ambient light sensor can adjust the brightness of the display panel 1061 according to the brightness of the ambient light
  • the proximity sensor can turn off the display panel when the mobile terminal 100 moves to the ear. 1061 and/or backlight.
  • the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in various directions (generally three axes), and can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity when it is stationary, and can be used to identify the application of mobile phone posture (such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, related Games, magnetometer attitude calibration), vibration recognition related functions (such as pedometer, tap), etc.; as for mobile phones, fingerprint sensors, pressure sensors, iris sensors, molecular sensors, gyroscopes, barometers, hygrometers, Other sensors such as thermometers and infrared sensors will not be described in detail here.
  • the display unit 106 is used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user.
  • the display unit 106 may include a display panel 1061, and the display panel 1061 may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display, LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (Organic Light-Emitting Diode, OLED), or the like.
  • LCD Liquid Crystal Display
  • OLED Organic Light-Emitting Diode
  • the user input unit 107 can be used to receive input numbers or character information, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile terminal.
  • the user input unit 107 may include a touch panel 1071 and other input devices 1072 .
  • the touch panel 1071 also referred to as a touch screen, can collect touch operations of the user on or near it (for example, the user uses any suitable object or accessory such as a finger or a stylus on the touch panel 1071 or near the touch panel 1071). operation), and drive the corresponding connection device according to the preset program.
  • the touch panel 1071 may include two parts, a touch detection device and a touch controller.
  • the touch detection device detects the user's touch orientation, detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives touch information from the touch detection device and converts it into contact coordinates , and then sent to the processor 110, and can receive the command sent by the processor 110 and execute it.
  • the touch panel 1071 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave.
  • the user input unit 107 may also include other input devices 1072 .
  • other input devices 1072 may include, but are not limited to, one or more of physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control buttons, switch buttons, etc.), trackballs, mice, joysticks, etc., which are not limited here. .
  • the touch panel 1071 may cover the display panel 1061.
  • the touch panel 1071 detects a touch operation on or near it, it transmits to the processor 110 to determine the type of the touch event, and then the processor 110 determines the touch event according to the touch event.
  • the corresponding visual output is provided on the display panel 1061 .
  • the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 are used as two independent components to realize the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, in some embodiments, the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 can be integrated.
  • the implementation of the input and output functions of the mobile terminal is not specifically limited here.
  • the interface unit 108 serves as an interface through which at least one external device can be connected with the mobile terminal 100 .
  • an external device may include a wired or wireless headset port, an external power (or battery charger) port, a wired or wireless data port, a memory card port, a port for connecting a device with an identification module, audio input/output (I/O) ports, video I/O ports, headphone ports, and more.
  • the interface unit 108 can be used to receive input from an external device (for example, data information, power, etc.) transfer data between devices.
  • the memory 109 can be used to store software programs as well as various data.
  • the memory 109 can mainly include a storage program area and a storage data area.
  • the storage program area can store an operating system, at least one function required application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) etc.
  • the storage data area can be Store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created according to the use of the mobile phone.
  • the memory 109 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other volatile solid-state storage devices.
  • the processor 110 is the control center of the mobile terminal, and uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the entire mobile terminal, by running or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 109, and calling data stored in the memory 109 , execute various functions of the mobile terminal and process data, so as to monitor the mobile terminal as a whole.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units; preferably, the processor 110 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor.
  • the application processor mainly processes operating systems, user interfaces, and application programs, etc.
  • the demodulation processor mainly handles wireless communication. It can be understood that the foregoing modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 110 .
  • the mobile terminal 100 can also include a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components.
  • a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components.
  • the power supply 111 can be logically connected to the processor 110 through a power management system, so as to manage charging, discharging, and power consumption through the power management system. and other functions.
  • the mobile terminal 100 may also include a Bluetooth module, etc., which will not be repeated here.
  • the following describes the communication network system on which the mobile terminal of the present application is based.
  • Fig. 2 is a kind of communication network system architecture diagram that the embodiment of the present application provides, and this communication network system is the LTE system of general mobile communication technology, and this LTE system includes the UE (User Equipment, user equipment) that communication connects sequentially ) 201, E-UTRAN (Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network, Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network) 202, EPC (Evolved Packet Core, Evolved Packet Core Network) 203 and the operator's IP service 204.
  • UE User Equipment, user equipment
  • E-UTRAN Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core, Evolved Packet Core Network
  • the UE 201 may be the above-mentioned terminal 100, which will not be repeated here.
  • E-UTRAN 202 includes eNodeB 2021 and other eNodeB 2022 and so on.
  • the eNodeB 2021 can be connected to other eNodeB 2022 through a backhaul (for example, X2 interface), the eNodeB 2021 is connected to the EPC 203 , and the eNodeB 2021 can provide access from the UE 201 to the EPC 203 .
  • a backhaul for example, X2 interface
  • EPC203 may include MME (Mobility Management Entity, Mobility Management Entity) 2031, HSS (Home Subscriber Server, Home Subscriber Server) 2032, other MME2033, SGW (Serving Gate Way, Serving Gateway) 2034, PGW (PDN Gate Way, packet data Network Gateway) 2035 and PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function, Policy and Charging Functional Entity) 2036, etc.
  • MME2031 is a control node that processes signaling between UE201 and EPC203, and provides bearer and connection management.
  • HSS2032 is used to provide some registers to manage functions such as home location register (not shown in the figure), and save some user-specific information about service features and data rates.
  • PCRF2036 is the policy and charging control policy decision point of service data flow and IP bearer resources, it is the policy and charging execution function A unit (not shown) selects and provides available policy and charging control decisions.
  • the IP service 204 may include Internet, Intranet, IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem, IP Multimedia Subsystem) or other IP services.
  • IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem, IP Multimedia Subsystem
  • LTE system is used as an example above, those skilled in the art should know that this application is not only applicable to the LTE system, but also applicable to other wireless communication systems, such as GSM, CDMA2000, WCDMA, TD-SCDMA and future new wireless communication systems.
  • the network system (such as 5G), etc., is not limited here.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic flowchart of an icon display method provided by the embodiment of this application. This method can be applied to smart terminals such as mobile terminals or fixed terminals. An example is described by taking the execution subject as a mobile terminal as an example.
  • the icon display method shown in this embodiment includes:
  • the mobile terminal may include at least one icon area.
  • each icon area in the at least one icon area may refer to a large folder or an application card. It can be understood that the icon area in the mobile terminal includes at least one icon sub-area, and any icon sub-area in the at least one icon sub-area can display any icon in the icon area.
  • different icon areas may have different area identifications, wherein the area identifications of different icon areas may be set by the mobile terminal or by the user.
  • the icons contained in the icon area may refer to one or more of the following: an icon used to indicate an application (that is, an icon corresponding to the application), an icon used to indicate an application function (optionally a collection icon or scan icon, etc.), an icon used to indicate the function of the mobile terminal (optionally a flashlight icon or a setting icon, etc.), an icon used to indicate content (optionally an icon for notification information or an icon for conversation content, etc.).
  • the icon area as an example referring to a large folder
  • the icon in the icon area as an example for indicating an application.
  • the difference between the icon area and the small folder is that the user can operate the icon displayed in the icon sub-area of the icon area or the application corresponding to the icon without expanding the icon area.
  • the user can click any icon displayed in each icon sub-area of the icon area without expanding the icon area, and the mobile terminal can respond to the user's click operation and activate the icon indicated by the user's click operation. corresponding application.
  • the mobile terminal may include a lock icon area, and the user can only perform a start operation on icons in the lock icon area to start a program corresponding to the icon indicated by the start operation, such as start an application corresponding to the icon.
  • a start operation on icons in the lock icon area to start a program corresponding to the icon indicated by the start operation, such as start an application corresponding to the icon.
  • the user cannot perform other operations on the icons in the locked icon area, such as operations such as moving out or uninstalling.
  • the mobile terminal may use a preset icon area as the target icon area, and the preset icon area may be an icon area set by the mobile terminal, or an icon area set by the user as desired.
  • the mobile terminal can use any of the above icon areas as the target icon area, and the specific way for the user to perform the scene operation can be found in the following description .
  • the mobile terminal may respond to the area setting operation performed by the user and use the icon area indicated by the area setting operation as the target icon area.
  • the present application does not limit the specific manner of determining the target icon area.
  • the above-mentioned target scene mode can be any scene mode in the scene mode set in the mobile terminal, and the scene mode set can include attribute-type scene modes and non-attribute-type scene modes.
  • attribute-type scene modes include but are not limited to game scenes mode, social scene mode and office scene mode, etc.
  • non-attribute scene modes include but are not limited to simple scene mode and fresh scene mode, etc., taking fresh scene mode as an example, the target icon area is in the fresh scene mode, the target icon area At least one icon in can be presented in a small and fresh style, so that the display style of at least one icon is a small and fresh style.
  • the attribute-type scene mode there may be scene attribute information, and different attribute-type scene modes correspond to different scene attribute information, and the scene attribute information can be used to indicate the attribute of the corresponding scene mode.
  • the target icon area If the scene mode is a game scene mode, then the scene attribute information corresponding to the scene mode may be "game”.
  • the process of determining the target scene mode of the target icon area includes steps s11 and s12:
  • the mobile terminal may determine the application attribute information of the application corresponding to each icon in the target icon area, perform quantitative accumulation processing according to the application attribute information of the application corresponding to each icon in the target icon area, and obtain the application attribute information corresponding to each application attribute information.
  • the number of icons, and the application attribute information whose quantity satisfies the preset quantity condition in each application attribute information is used as the area attribute information of the target icon area.
  • the number of application attribute information satisfying the preset quantity condition may refer to the application attribute information whose quantity is greater than the preset quantity threshold, or may refer to the application attribute information with the largest quantity, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the aforementioned preset quantity threshold may be set by the mobile terminal, or may be set by the user as desired, which is not limited in this application.
  • the mobile terminal After adding up the application attribute information of the application corresponding to each icon, it can be obtained that the number of icons corresponding to the application attribute information "game” is 2, and the number of icons corresponding to the application attribute information "social” is 1. Assume that the number meets the preset Assuming that the application attribute information of the quantity condition refers to the application attribute information with the largest quantity, then the mobile terminal may use the application attribute information "game” as the area attribute information of the target icon area.
  • the number of application attribute information that meets the preset quantity condition means that the number is greater than the preset
  • the mobile terminal can use the application attribute information "game” as the above-mentioned area attribute information; if the preset number threshold is 0, it can be understood that the application attribute information "game” If the number of icons corresponding to the application attribute information "social” satisfies the preset quantity condition, then the mobile terminal can use any one of the application attribute information "game” and the application attribute information "social” as the above-mentioned area attribute information.
  • the mobile terminal may trigger an area identification setting instruction in the target icon area, and respond to the area identification setting instruction, using the area identification indicated by the area identification setting instruction as the area attribute information of the target icon area.
  • the mobile terminal may trigger an area identification setting instruction on the target icon area, wherein the area identification indicated by the area identification setting instruction may refer to the area identification setting operation.
  • the entered zone ID may be the user's identification input operation on the area identification, or the user's identification selection operation on the area identification. This application does not limit the specific implementation of the area identification setting operation.
  • the mobile terminal may display an area identification setting area corresponding to the target icon area, and if the user performs an area identification setting operation in the area identification setting area, the mobile terminal may trigger an area identification setting instruction in the target icon area.
  • the mobile terminal may respond to the click operation performed by the user to display the area identification setting area corresponding to the target icon area. If the region has performed the region identifier setting operation, then the mobile terminal can trigger the region identifier setting instruction in the target icon region.
  • the mobile terminal may respond to the long press operation performed by the user and display the area editing menu corresponding to the target icon area.
  • the area editing menu includes area identification setting options.
  • the mobile terminal can respond to the click operation performed by the user and display the area identification setting area corresponding to the target icon area. If the user performs the area identification setting operation in the area identification setting area, then the mobile terminal can The target icon area triggers the area flag setting command.
  • the attribute-type scene mode there may be scene attribute information, and different attribute-type scene modes correspond to different scene attribute information, and the scene attribute information can be used to indicate the attribute of the corresponding scene mode.
  • the target icon area If the scene mode is a game scene mode, then the scene attribute information corresponding to the scene mode may be "game”.
  • the attribute scene modes in the mobile terminal can include game scene modes, social scene modes and office scene modes, and the scene attribute information of the game scene mode can be "game”, and the scene attribute information of the social scene mode can be The scene attribute information of the "social” and office scene modes may be "office”.
  • the region attribute information of the target icon region is "game”
  • the scene mode corresponding to the determined scene property information is a game scene mode
  • the mobile terminal can use the game scene mode as the target scene mode of the target icon area.
  • the process of determining the target scene mode of the target icon area includes steps s21 and s22:
  • the mobile terminal may trigger the scene mode editing command in the target icon area, thereby displaying the scene mode editing menu indicated by the scene mode editing command, wherein the scene mode editing command
  • the indicated scene mode editing menu may refer to a scene mode editing menu indicated by a scene mode editing operation.
  • the above scene mode editing operation may refer to the user's long-press operation on the target icon area, or may refer to the user's continuous clicking operation on the target icon area. This application does not limit the specific implementation of the scene mode editing operation.
  • FIG. 4a is a schematic diagram of an icon provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • taking the target icon area as the icon area 411 as an example when the user performs scene mode editing operations on the target icon area, move The terminal can trigger a scene mode editing command in the target icon area, so as to display the scene mode editing menu 413 indicated by the scene mode editing command.
  • the mobile terminal can trigger a scene mode selection command in the scene mode edit menu, so that the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection command is used as the target scene of the target icon area mode, wherein the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection instruction may refer to the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection operation.
  • the above-mentioned scene mode selection operation may be the user's click operation on any scene mode contained in the scene mode editing menu. It can be understood that the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection operation refers to the user's click operation in the scene mode edit menu.
  • the active scene mode; the above scene mode selection operation can also be the scene mode sliding operation of the user on the scene mode editing menu, and the scene mode sliding operation can slide any scene mode contained in the scene mode editing menu to the scene mode determination area, That is to say, the scene mode in the scene mode determination area is the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection operation, and the present application does not limit the specific implementation manner of the scene mode selection operation.
  • the scene mode editing menu 413 includes a simple scene mode, a refreshing scene mode and a game scene mode.
  • Scene mode selection operation and the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection operation is the game scene mode, then the mobile terminal can trigger the scene mode selection command in the scene mode editing menu, and the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection command (that is, the game scene mode) The target scene mode as the target icon area.
  • the mobile terminal may determine the application attribute information of the application corresponding to each icon in the target icon area, and use the icon whose application attribute information in the target icon area matches the target scene mode as at least one icon.
  • the above application attribute information may refer to the attribute of the application corresponding to the icon.
  • the application attribute information of the application corresponding to the icon is "game”. ".
  • the target icon area includes icons A, B, and C
  • the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon A and icon B is "game”
  • the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon C is "social”
  • the target scene mode is the game scene mode
  • the application attribute information "game” matches the target scene mode, that is, the icons in the target icon area where the application attribute information matches the target scene mode include icon A and icon B
  • the mobile terminal can Take icon A and icon B as at least one icon.
  • the mobile terminal may determine whether the target scene mode is an attribute scene mode, and if so, use the icon whose application attribute information in the target icon area matches the target scene mode as at least one icon; All icons in as at least one icon.
  • the target icon area includes icons A, B, and C
  • the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon A and icon B is "game”
  • the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon C is "social”
  • the mobile terminal can use icons A and B as at least one icon
  • the target scene mode is a refreshing scene mode
  • the mobile terminal can use icons A, B and C as at least one icon.
  • the above scene interface may refer to a display interface generated according to the target scene mode, wherein the display interface may be independent of the target icon area, for example, the display interface may be displayed at the display position of the area where the target icon area is located; or, the display The interface may be independent of the icon display area.
  • the display interface may be displayed at the interface display position where the icon display interface is located, which is not limited in this application.
  • the mobile terminal when it generates or determines the scene-based interface according to the target scene mode, it can determine the display background of the scene-based interface.
  • the display background can be the display background indicated by the target scene mode; it can also determine the display background indicated by the target scene mode.
  • the layout format may refer to the distribution of display positions of preset icons in the scene-based interface. This application does not limit the specific content of generating or determining the scene-based interface according to the target scene mode. It can be understood that, when the scene interface includes at least one preset icon display position, the mobile terminal may display at least one icon at each preset icon display position in the at least one preset icon display position.
  • the above-mentioned preset icon display position may be set by the mobile terminal, or set by the user according to wishes, which is not limited in this application.
  • the mobile terminal may trigger a scene-based instruction in the target icon area, and respond to the scene-based instruction, thereby triggering the generation or determination of the scene-based interface according to the target scene mode, and displaying at least one icon in the scene-based interface.
  • the mobile terminal may trigger a scenario instruction in the target icon area if the user performs a scenario operation on the target icon area.
  • the user When the user performs a scene operation on the target icon area, the user can press and hold the target icon area, and the mobile terminal responds to the long press operation performed by the user, and displays the area editing menu corresponding to the target icon area.
  • the area editing menu includes generating or determining the scene If you want to select the option of the scene-based interface in the region edit menu, the user can realize the scene-based operation of the target icon area by selecting the area menu in the area edit menu or determining the scene-based interface option; the user can also perform the area expansion operation on the target icon area , the mobile terminal displays all the icons in the target icon area in response to the area expansion operation performed by the user, and obtains the icon display interface corresponding to the target icon area, and the icon display interface includes the first preset sub-area, then the user can select Set the click operation of the sub-area to realize the scene-based operation of the target icon area.
  • the area expansion operation may be the user's click operation on the blank area of the target icon area, or the user's click operation on the second preset sub-area of the target icon area.
  • the specific implementation method of the area expansion operation in this application Not limited.
  • the present application does not limit the specific implementation manner of the scene-based operation.
  • FIG. 4b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the display interface 415 includes two icon areas, which are icon area 416 and icon area 417, respectively.
  • the area identification can be different, the area identification of the icon area 416 is "tool”, the area identification of the icon area 417 is "game”, taking the target icon area as the icon area 417 as an example, the target icon area includes icons E, K, M, H and O.
  • the target scene mode is a game scene mode, at least one icon includes icons E, M, and H.
  • the mobile terminal can respond to the long press operation performed by the user and display the area editing menu 418 corresponding to the target icon area. If the user performs an area menu selection operation on the option of generating or determining a scene-based interface in the area edit menu 418, that is, the user performs a scene-based operation on the target icon area through the above-mentioned area menu selection operation, then the mobile terminal can operate on the target icon area.
  • the icon area triggers the scenario instruction and responds to the scenario instruction, thereby generating or determining the scenario interface (ie, the display interface 419 ) according to the target scenario mode, and displaying at least one icon in the scenario interface.
  • the mobile terminal may perform form or parameter change processing on at least one icon according to the target scene mode, obtain an icon corresponding to the form or parameter update of the at least one icon, and display the icon corresponding to the at least one icon in the scene interface. Icon after the pattern or parameter has been updated.
  • FIG. 4c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG.
  • the mobile terminal can perform form or parameter change processing on at least one icon according to the target scene mode, assuming that the form or parameter corresponding to icon E is updated
  • the icon after icon 424 is icon 424, the icon corresponding to the form of icon M or the icon after parameter update is icon 425, and the icon after icon H is corresponding to form or parameter update is icon 426, then the mobile terminal can use icon 424, icon 425 and icon 426 Displayed in the scene interface.
  • the mobile terminal changes the shape or parameter of the icon may refer to: adjust the size, shape, color, shape angle and related parameters of the icon, the specific processing method of the application for the shape or parameter change Not limited.
  • the mobile terminal may determine a target display area corresponding to the target icon area, generate or determine a scene interface in the target display area according to the target scene mode, and display at least one icon in the scene interface.
  • the mobile terminal may use the interface display position where the icon display interface is located as the target display area, or may use the area display position where the target icon area is located as the target display area.
  • the specific method for determining the target display area is not limited in this application.
  • FIG. 4d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the display interface 427 includes an icon area 428.
  • the target icon area as the icon area 428 as an example, if the user selects the target The icon area has performed the area expansion operation, and the mobile terminal can respond to the area expansion operation performed by the user to display all the icons in the target icon area (ie icons E, K, M, H, and O), and obtain the icon display interface corresponding to the target icon area (ie display interface 429).
  • the mobile terminal can generate or determine a scene interface in the target display area according to the target scene mode (ie display interface 432), assuming that at least one icon includes icons E, M, and H, then the mobile terminal may display the icons E, M, and H on the scene interface.
  • the target scene mode ie display interface 432
  • the mobile terminal may display the icons E, M, and H on the scene interface.
  • the icon display interface corresponding to the target icon area may include the first preset area; otherwise, the icon display interface corresponding to the target icon area may not include the first preset area.
  • the icon display interface (that is, the display interface 429) may include a first preset sub-area (that is, the display area 430). If the sub-area is clicked, the mobile terminal can generate or determine a scene interface (ie, display interface 432 ) according to the target scene mode in response to the click operation performed by the user.
  • the target display area is the target icon area
  • the mobile terminal generates or determines the scene interface in the target display area according to the target scene mode, including: triggering a display switching instruction in the target icon area; responding to the display switching instruction, according to the target scene mode Generate or determine the scene interface in the target icon area.
  • the mobile terminal may trigger a display switching instruction on the target icon area.
  • the display switching operation may refer to the user's sliding operation on the target icon area, or may refer to the user's continuous clicking operation on the target icon area. This application does not limit the specific implementation of the display switching operation.
  • FIG. 4e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the display interface 433 includes an icon area 434, taking the target icon area as the icon area 434 as an example, and assuming the target scene The mode is a game scene mode. If the user performs a display switching operation on the target icon area, the mobile terminal can trigger a display switching command in the target icon area, and in response to the display switching command, according to the target scene mode, the target display area (i.e., the display area 436 ) to generate or determine the scene interface.
  • the target display area i.e., the display area 436
  • the mobile terminal generates or determines the scene-based interface according to the target scene mode, and after displaying at least one icon in the scene-based interface, it can trigger a hidden command on the scene-based interface, and respond to the hidden command to cancel the target icon area.
  • the display of the scene interface after the mobile terminal generates or determines the scene-based interface according to the target scene mode, and displays at least one icon in the scene-based interface, if the user performs a hidden operation on the scene-based interface, then the mobile terminal can trigger Hidden instructions.
  • Hidden instructions may refer to the user's sliding operation on the scene interface, or the user's continuous clicking operation on the scene interface, or the user's setting operation on the notification bar, etc.
  • the hidden operation of this application The specific implementation is not limited.
  • the mobile terminal after the mobile terminal generates a scene-based interface corresponding to the target icon area in the target display area (that is, the display area 436), if the user selects the scene If the hidden operation is performed on the customized interface, then the mobile terminal can trigger a hidden command on the scene-based interface, and respond to the hidden command, cancel the display of the corresponding scene-based interface to the target icon area, and display the target icon area (ie, the icon area 438) on the In the target display area (that is, the area display position where the icon area 438 is located).
  • the mobile terminal can display at least one icon in the target icon area in the scene interface, and if the target scene modes are different, then at least one icon in the target icon area can be displayed in different scene interfaces , so that the icons in the target icon area are displayed in a variety or interest; and the target display area can be determined. If the target display areas are different, then the scene interface can be generated or determined in different target display areas according to the target scene mode , which is convenient for the user to quickly view the scene-based interface corresponding to the target icon area; it is also possible to cancel the display of the scene-based interface, so that the user can manage the scene-based interface according to his wishes.
  • the mobile terminal can determine the area attribute information of the target icon area, and use the scene mode in which the scene attribute information matches the area attribute information as the target scene mode.
  • the mobile terminal can use different scene modes as the target scene mode. mode, so as to display the icons in the target icon area in a variety or interesting way.
  • the mobile terminal can use the scene mode set by the user as the target scene mode to achieve the purpose of generating or determining the scene interface according to the scene mode set by the user. Icons are displayed in a variety or interesting way.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of an icon processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application. This method can be applied to a smart terminal, so the execution subject of the embodiment of the present application may be a smart terminal.
  • the icon processing method shown in this embodiment includes:
  • S501 Determine the target icon area and the target display mode, where the target display mode is the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located or the target theme mode of the smart terminal.
  • the smart terminal may include at least one icon area, and optionally, each icon area in the at least one icon area may refer to a large folder or an application card. It can be understood that the icon area in the smart terminal includes at least one icon sub-area, and any icon sub-area in the at least one icon sub-area can display any icon in the icon area. Optionally, different icon areas may have different area identifications, wherein the area identifications of different icon areas may be set by the smart terminal or by the user.
  • the icons contained in the icon area may refer to one or more of the following: an icon used to indicate an application (that is, an icon corresponding to the application), an icon used to indicate an application function (optionally a collection icon or scan icon, etc.), an icon used to indicate the function of the smart terminal (optionally a flashlight icon or a setting icon, etc.), an icon used to indicate content (optionally an icon for notification information or an icon for conversation content, etc.).
  • the icon area as an example referring to a large folder
  • the icon in the icon area as an example for indicating an application.
  • the difference between the icon area and the small folder is that the user can operate the icon displayed in the icon sub-area of the icon area or the application corresponding to the icon without expanding the icon area.
  • the user can click any icon displayed in each icon sub-area of the icon area without expanding the icon area, and the smart terminal can respond to the user's click operation and start the icon indicated by the user's click operation corresponding application.
  • the smart terminal may include a lock icon area, and the user can only perform a start operation on icons in the lock icon area to start a program corresponding to the icon indicated by the start operation, such as start an application corresponding to the icon.
  • a start operation on icons in the lock icon area to start a program corresponding to the icon indicated by the start operation, such as start an application corresponding to the icon.
  • the user cannot perform other operations on the icons in the locked icon area, such as operations such as moving out or uninstalling.
  • the smart terminal may use a preset icon area as the target icon area, and the preset icon area may be an icon area set by the smart terminal, or an icon area set by the user as desired.
  • the smart terminal may use the above-mentioned any icon area as the target icon area.
  • the smart terminal can use the icon area in the lock screen interface as the target icon area, or the smart terminal can use the icon area in a certain split-screen display area as the target icon area, and the above-mentioned certain split-screen display area can be at least Any split-screen display area of the two split-screen display areas or specific one or more split-screen display areas.
  • the present application does not limit the manner of determining the target icon area.
  • the above target display mode may refer to the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located, or the target theme mode of the smart terminal.
  • the interface display mode may be a split-screen display mode, a lock-screen display mode, a minus-one-screen display mode, or an automatic clustering mode, which is not limited in this application.
  • the smart terminal may use the split-screen display mode as the interface display mode; if the target icon area is an icon area on the lock screen interface, That is to say, if the area interface where the target icon area is located is the lock screen interface, then the smart terminal can use the lock screen display mode as the interface display mode; If the regional interface of the region is a negative one-screen interface, then the smart terminal can use the negative one-screen mode as the interface display mode.
  • the negative one-screen interface can refer to sliding the interface from the main interface to the right until the interface cannot be slid to the right
  • the negative one-screen interface can contain application cards such as to-do lists, travel plans, and weather forecasts, among which the application cards can display key information of at least one application (such as the number of exercise steps, the name of the to-do items, or the location of the smart terminal. The real-time temperature of the area, etc.), and present it in the form of a card; if the area interface where the target icon area is located has an automatic clustering function for the icons in the display screen, the automatic clustering function can refer to the display screen. Each icon is moved to the matching icon area, then the smart terminal can use the automatic clustering mode as the interface display mode.
  • the target theme mode of the smart terminal may be meeting mode, flight mode, riding mode, or outdoor mode, etc., which is not limited in the present application, wherein the smart terminal processes the icons in the target icon area according to the target theme mode
  • the smart terminal processes the icons in the target icon area according to the target theme mode
  • the smart terminal may determine the size of the target icon area according to the target display mode, and display the target icon area according to the size of the target icon area. It can be understood that if the target display modes are different, the size of the target icon area may be different.
  • the above size may describe the number of icon sub-areas included in the target icon area, and the distribution manner of the icon sub-areas included in the target icon area.
  • the size of the target icon area determined by the smart terminal is 3*2, that is to say, the target icon area may contain 6 icon sub-areas, and the contained icon sub-areas are distributed in 3 rows, and each row contains 2 icon sub-areas.
  • the target display mode can refer to the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located, and the size of the target icon area in the lock screen display mode is 3*3, and the target icon area in negative one-screen display mode The size of the target icon is 1*4, then when the target display mode is the lock screen display mode, the smart terminal can determine the size of the target icon area as 3*3 according to the target display mode, and display the target icon area according to the size of 3*3 .
  • the smart terminal may adjust the size of the target icon area according to the number of icons in the target icon area, obtain the adjusted size, and display the target icon area according to the adjusted size.
  • the smart terminal may determine the ratio of the number of icon sub-regions indicated by the size of the target icon area to the number of icons in the target icon area. If the ratio is greater than a preset threshold, the smart terminal may determine the size of the target icon area Make adjustments.
  • the smart terminal can adjust the size of the target icon area to 1*2 or 2*2, etc. It can be understood that the icon sub-area indicated by the adjusted size is consistent with the target The ratio of the number of icons in the icon area is less than or equal to a preset threshold.
  • the above-mentioned preset threshold may be set by the smart terminal, or may be set by the user according to wishes, which is not limited in this application.
  • the smart terminal may determine the area interface where the target icon area is located, and the interface display mode of the area interface; and use the interface display mode as the target display mode.
  • the above-mentioned area interface may be a lock screen interface, a main interface, a negative one-screen interface, another screen interface, or a display interface corresponding to the split-screen display area where the target icon area is located, which is not limited in this application.
  • the negative one-screen interface can refer to the display interface when sliding the interface to the right from the main interface until the interface cannot be slid to the right, and the negative one-screen interface can include applications such as to-do lists, travel plans, and weather forecasts Card;
  • another screen interface can refer to a display interface with automatic clustering function, the smart terminal can cluster all the icons on the display screen, and move the icons of the same type to the same icon area, so that the display screen Each icon in moves to the corresponding icon area.
  • the smart terminal can determine the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located.
  • the interface display mode can be a split-screen display mode, a lock screen display mode, or a negative one-screen display mode Or an automatic clustering mode, etc., which are not limited in this application.
  • the smart terminal may use the split-screen display mode as the interface display mode; if the target icon area is an icon area on the lock screen interface, That is to say, if the area interface where the target icon area is located is the lock screen interface, then the smart terminal can use the lock screen display mode as the interface display mode; If the area interface of the target icon area is a negative one-screen interface, then the smart terminal can use the negative one-screen mode as the interface display mode; if the area interface where the target icon area is located has an automatic clustering function for the icons on the display screen, the automatic clustering function It can refer to moving each icon in the display screen to the matching icon area, then the smart terminal can use the automatic clustering mode as the interface display mode.
  • the area interface with the automatic clustering function can be the main interface or Another screen interface, which is not limited in this application.
  • the smart terminal may determine the target theme mode of the smart terminal; and use the target theme mode as the target display mode.
  • the aforementioned target theme mode may be a meeting mode, an airplane mode, a riding mode, or an outdoor mode, which is not limited in this application.
  • the smart terminal can determine the icon matching the target theme pattern.
  • the smart terminal may use icons corresponding to meeting-related applications as icons matching the meeting mode, and meeting-related applications such as file management, e-mail and other applications; If the target theme mode of the smart terminal is flight mode, then the smart terminal can use icons corresponding to flight-related applications as icons matching the flight mode, that is, icons corresponding to applications that do not need to be connected to the Internet can be used as icons matching the flight mode , such as icons corresponding to applications such as calculator and gallery; if the theme mode of the smart terminal is riding mode, then the smart terminal can use icons corresponding to riding-related applications as icons matching the riding mode, such as navigation, clock If the target theme mode of the smart terminal is the outdoor mode, then the smart terminal can use icons corresponding to outdoor-related applications as icons matching the outdoor mode, such as icons corresponding to applications such as navigation and compass.
  • the smart terminal may acquire application attribute information of applications corresponding to icons in the target icon area, and determine icons in the target icon area that match the target theme pattern according to the application attribute information.
  • the target icon area contains icons A, B, and C
  • the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon A and icon B is "meeting”
  • the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon C is "ride” and " Outdoor”
  • the smart terminal can use icon A and icon B as the icons matching the target theme mode
  • the target theme mode is cycling mode or outdoor mode
  • the smart terminal can set icon C As an icon matching the target theme pattern.
  • the smart terminal can also obtain the label information corresponding to each icon in the target icon area, and determine the icon in the target icon area that matches the target theme pattern according to the label information.
  • the label information can be "meeting” or “ride”. wait. This application does not limit the specific content of the application attribute information or tag information.
  • the smart terminal can use the preset theme mode as the target theme mode, the preset theme mode can be a meeting mode, flight mode, riding mode or outdoor mode, etc., and the preset theme mode can be set by the smart terminal, It may also be set by the user according to wishes, which is not limited in this application.
  • the smart terminal can display all the theme modes included, and the user can perform a theme mode selection operation among all the displayed theme modes, and then the smart terminal can use the theme mode selected by the theme mode selection operation as the target theme mode.
  • the setting interface of the smart terminal may include theme mode setting options, and the user can perform a click operation on the theme mode setting options on the setting interface, and then the smart terminal can respond to the click operation performed by the user and display the theme mode editing interface.
  • the interface can display all the theme modes included in the smart terminal. If the user performs a theme mode selection operation on any theme mode in the theme editing interface, the smart terminal can use the theme mode selected by the theme mode selection operation as the target theme mode.
  • all the theme modes contained in the smart terminal may be displayed in the notification bar of the smart terminal. If the user performs a theme mode selection operation in the notification bar, the smart terminal may use the theme mode selected by the theme mode selection operation as the target theme mode or, the notification bar of the smart terminal may include theme mode setting options, if the user clicks on the theme mode setting options, then the smart terminal may respond to the click operation performed by the user and display the theme mode editing interface, then the smart terminal may display the theme mode editing interface according to The theme mode selection operation performed by the user on the theme mode editing interface determines the target theme mode.
  • the smart terminal may process the icons in the target icon area according to the above interface display mode.
  • the display screen used to display the target icon area includes at least two split-screen display areas, that is, the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located is a split-screen display mode, if the target icon area is located in In the first split-screen display area of the at least two split-screen display areas, when the user clicks on the first icon in the target icon area, the smart terminal can respond to the click operation performed by the user to start the first icon, and at least two The application interface of the application corresponding to the first icon is displayed in the second split-screen display area of the first split-screen display area, wherein the first icon is any icon in the target icon area, and the first split-screen display area is at least two split-screens Any split-screen display area in the display area, the second split-screen display area is any split-screen display area except the first split-screen display
  • the smart terminal can process the icons in the target icon area according to the target theme mode.
  • the target theme mode of the smart terminal is a meeting mode
  • the smart terminal can only display icons that match the meeting mode in the target icon area (that is, icons corresponding to applications related to meetings, and applications related to meetings such as file management , e-mail and other applications) are displayed on the display screen; or, if the user performs any operation on any icon in the target icon area, if and only if any of the above-mentioned icons is an icon that matches the conference mode, the smart terminal Can respond to any of the above actions performed by the user.
  • any of the above operations is a click operation
  • the smart terminal can respond to the click operation performed by the user to start the application corresponding to any of the above icons, otherwise, the smart terminal Then the application corresponding to any of the above icons will not be started.
  • the smart terminal may use the determined interface display mode as the target display mode, so as to process the icons in the target icon area according to the target display mode.
  • the interface display mode is a split-screen display mode
  • the display screen used to display the target icon area includes at least two split-screen display areas
  • the smart terminal can trigger the first start command on the first icon in the target icon area
  • the area interface where the target icon area is located is the display interface corresponding to the first split-screen display area in the at least two split-screen display areas
  • the smart terminal can respond to the first startup instruction, start the application corresponding to the first icon
  • the application interface of the application corresponding to the first icon is displayed in the second split-screen display area
  • the second split-screen display area is any split-screen display area except the first split-screen display area among the at least two split-screen display areas.
  • the above-mentioned display screen including at least two split-screen display areas may be a folding screen, and the display area in one folding screen is a split-screen display area; or, there is no folding angle on the display screen, that is, the display screen only presents
  • the at least two split-screen display areas are at least two display areas in the display screen, and the at least two display areas are displayed in split screens in the display screen;
  • the above-mentioned application interface can display the application menu of the application corresponding to the first icon, The application content of the application corresponding to the first icon may also be displayed, which is not limited in this application.
  • the smart terminal may trigger the first startup instruction on the first icon in the target icon area.
  • the first start operation may be a user's click operation on the first icon, or an application selection operation performed by the user in an application editing menu corresponding to the first icon.
  • the user can long press the first icon, and the smart terminal displays the application editing menu corresponding to the first icon in response to the long pressing operation of the user. An application selection operation is performed, thereby performing a first launch operation on the first icon.
  • FIG. 6a is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the display screen includes two split-screen display areas, which are split-screen display area 611 and split-screen display area 612 . If the split-screen display area 611 and the split-screen display area 612 are two display areas displayed in split screens on the display screen, then the display interfaces corresponding to the split-screen display area 611 and the split-screen display area 612 may both be the display interface 610.
  • the screen display area 611 corresponds to the split screen display area 616 in the display interface 615
  • the split screen display area 612 corresponds to the split screen display area 617 in the display interface 615 .
  • the display interfaces corresponding to the split-screen display area 611 and the split-screen display area 612 may be different display interfaces.
  • the split-screen display area 612 includes an icon area 613 and an icon area 614
  • the area identification of the icon area 613 is "game”
  • the number of icon sub-areas is 4
  • the area identification of the icon area 614 is "social”
  • the icon sub-area The number of regions is 4.
  • the target icon area i.e. the icon area 614
  • the target icon area is located in the first split-screen display area (i.e. the split-screen display area 612).
  • the smart terminal can trigger the first startup command on the icon L, and then the smart terminal can respond to the first startup command, start the application corresponding to the icon L, and display the area in the second split screen in the display interface 615 ( That is, the application interface of the application corresponding to the icon L is displayed in the split-screen display area 616), that is, the smart terminal can display the first icon in the second split-screen display area (ie, the split-screen display area 616) in the display interface 615 The application interface of the corresponding application.
  • the specific implementation process for the smart terminal to process the icons in the target icon area according to the target display mode may be: the second icon in the target icon area triggers the second start command , the area interface where the target icon area is located is the lock screen interface; respond to the second start command to start the application corresponding to the second icon; or respond to the second start command to display the verification information input interface; obtain the verification information input in the verification information input interface ; If it is determined according to the verification information that the application corresponding to the second icon satisfies the preset verification condition, start the application corresponding to the second icon; and/or, if it is determined according to the verification information that the application corresponding to the second icon does not meet the preset verification condition, then The application corresponding to the second icon is not started.
  • the smart terminal may trigger the second startup instruction on the second icon in the target icon area.
  • the second start operation may be a user's click operation on the second icon, or an application selection operation performed by the user in the application editing menu corresponding to the second icon, which is not limited in this application.
  • the user can long press the second icon, and the smart terminal displays the application editing menu corresponding to the second icon in response to the user's long pressing operation. An application selection operation is performed, thereby performing a second launch operation on the second icon.
  • the above-mentioned verification information may be face recognition information, fingerprint recognition information, password verification information, etc.
  • the above-mentioned preset verification conditions may refer to verification conditions set by smart terminals or users, and the preset verification conditions may include face recognition information, Fingerprint identification information, password verification information, etc., when the verification information acquired by the smart terminal matches any of the preset verification conditions, it can be determined that the application corresponding to the second icon meets the preset verification conditions.
  • FIG. 6b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the display interface 620 as the lock screen interface as an example, the area where the target icon area (ie icon area 621) is located
  • the interface is a lock screen interface (that is, the display interface 620 ), the area identifier of the icon area 621 is "lock screen application", and the number of icon sub-areas is nine.
  • the smart terminal can click on the second icon (ie, the icon L) triggers the second start instruction, and displays the verification information input interface (ie, the display interface 622 ) in response to the second start instruction.
  • the input method of the verification information displayed on the verification information input interface is a graphic password input method
  • the verification information input by the user on the verification information input interface is the graphic password indicated by the sliding track 623
  • the smart terminal can obtain the password indicated by the sliding track 623.
  • the smart terminal can start the application corresponding to the second icon, and can display the application interface of the application corresponding to the second icon on the display interface 624; If the application does not satisfy the preset verification condition, the smart terminal may not start the application corresponding to the second icon (ie, the icon L).
  • the smart terminal can trigger a screen lock instruction on at least one icon in the first icon set, and then respond to the screen lock instruction, determine a third icon among the at least one icon that meets the preset lock screen display condition, and place the third icon Move to the target icon area.
  • the smart terminal may trigger a screen lock instruction on at least one icon in the first icon set, wherein the screen lock operation may be performed by the user on the first icon
  • the icon selection operation of at least one icon in the set may also be a multi-touch operation of the user on at least one icon in the first set of icons, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the icons included in the above-mentioned first icon set may be all icons located in all icon areas of the display screen, or all icons contained in the smart terminal, or all icons located in the display screen except for the icons contained in all icon areas. Icons, this application does not limit the specific icons included in the first icon set.
  • the aforementioned preset lock screen display conditions may refer to label information or attribute information, which is not limited in this application.
  • the smart terminal can judge whether each icon of the at least one icon meets the preset requirement according to the label information corresponding to each icon in the at least one icon.
  • the display condition is set, that is to say, the smart terminal can use the icon whose label information is "satisfied" among the above-mentioned at least one icon as the third icon; when the preset display condition is attribute information, and the attribute information is "game” and “social ", the smart terminal may use the icon corresponding to the application whose attribute information is "game” or “social” among the above at least one icon as the third icon that meets the preset display condition.
  • the preset display conditions may be set by the smart terminal, or set by the user according to wishes, which is not limited in this application.
  • the smart terminal may display a lock screen icon editing interface, which includes all icons in the first icon set, and triggers a lock screen instruction for at least one icon in the first icon set on the lock screen icon editing interface.
  • the user can perform a long press operation on the target icon area displayed on the lock screen interface, and the smart terminal responds to the long press operation performed by the user to display the area edit menu, which includes the lock screen icon edit option. If the lock screen icon editing option in the area editing menu is clicked, the smart terminal can respond to the user's click operation and display the lock screen icon editing interface.
  • the smart terminal may trigger a screen lock instruction for at least one icon in the first icon set on the screen lock icon editing interface.
  • the setting interface of the smart terminal includes a lock screen icon editing option
  • the user can perform a click operation on the lock screen icon editing option in the setting interface, and the smart terminal can respond to the user's click operation and display the lock screen icon editing interface, Similarly, the user can perform a screen lock operation on the at least one icon on the screen lock icon editing interface, so that the smart terminal can trigger a screen lock command on the at least one icon.
  • FIG. 6c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first icon set includes icons A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, N , J, K, L, and M, and display at least one icon in the first icon set on the display interface 625, that is to say, the display interface 625 can be an interface for editing lock screen icons.
  • the smart terminal can trigger a screen lock instruction on at least one icon in the first icon set in the display interface 625 .
  • the smart terminal can respond to the lock screen instruction, and determine the third icon that meets the preset lock screen display conditions among at least one icon (ie icons D, E, F, G, H, and N), assuming that the icon D in the at least one icon , E, F, G, and N meet the preset lock screen display conditions, then the smart terminal can use icons D, E, F, G, and N as the third icon, and take the display interface 626 as the lock screen interface as an example, then the smart terminal
  • the icon area 627 can be used as the target icon area, and the third icon (ie icons D, E, F, G and N) can be moved into the target icon area (ie icon area 627 ).
  • the smart terminal can trigger the icon area sliding command in the target icon area, determine the sliding track input by the icon area sliding command, and then use the interface display mode of the area interface where the end position of the sliding track is located as the updated target display mode , and process the icons in the target icon area according to the updated target display mode.
  • the smart terminal may trigger an icon area sliding instruction on the target icon area if the user performs an icon area sliding operation on the target icon area.
  • the user can perform a long press operation on the target icon area, and the smart terminal responds to the long press operation performed by the user to make the target icon area in a movable state, then the user can perform icon area sliding on the target icon area in the movable state operation, so that the smart terminal triggers an icon area sliding command on the target icon area; the user can also perform continuous clicking operations on the target icon area, and the smart terminal responds to the continuous clicking operations performed by the user to make the target icon area in a movable state.
  • the user can perform an icon area sliding operation on the movable target icon area, so that the smart terminal triggers an icon area sliding instruction on the target icon area.
  • the updated target display mode is negative one screen mode
  • the smart terminal can acquire the icons in the target icon area, determine the size of the target application card according to the icon in the target icon area, and generate or determine the target application card according to the size , and then display the icon in the target icon area in the target app card.
  • the smart terminal can determine the size of the target application card according to the number of icons in the target icon area, and the size can describe the number of card sub-areas contained in the target application card and the distribution of the card sub-areas contained in the target application card Way.
  • the size of the target application card determined by the smart terminal may be 1*N, that is, the target application card may include N card sub-areas, and the target application card includes The card sub-areas are distributed in one row, and each row contains N card sub-areas; the size of the target application card determined by the smart terminal can also be N*1, that is, the target application card can contain N card sub-areas, and the target application card can contain N card sub-areas.
  • the card sub-areas contained in the application card are distributed in N rows, and each row contains one card sub-area.
  • N is a positive integer. This application does not limit the size of the target application card in a specific form.
  • FIG. 6d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the smart terminal can trigger the icon area sliding command in the target icon area (i.e., the icon area 629), assuming that the area interface where the end position of the sliding track input by the icon area sliding command is located is the display interface 630, that is, In other words, the end position of the sliding track input by the icon area sliding command is located in the display interface 630, and the display interface 630 can be a negative one-screen interface, then the smart terminal can use the negative one-screen mode as the updated target display mode, and follow the The updated target display mode (ie negative one-screen mode) processes the icons in the target icon area.
  • the target icon area i.e., the icon area 629
  • the smart terminal When the smart terminal processes the icons in the target icon area according to the updated target display mode (i.e. negative one screen mode), it can acquire the icons J, K, L and M in the target icon area (i.e. icon area 629), And determine the size of the target application card according to icons J, K, L and M, that is to say, the smart terminal can determine the size of the target application card according to the number of icons in the target icon area, because the icons contained in the target icon area 629 If the number is 4, then the smart terminal can generate a target application card containing 4 card sub-areas. Taking the application card 631 displayed on the display interface 630 as the target application card as an example, the smart terminal can use the icons in the target icon area (i.e. Icons J, K, L, and M) are displayed in the target application card (ie, the application card 631).
  • the smart terminal can use the icons in the target icon area (i.e. Icons J, K, L, and M) are displayed in the target application card (ie, the
  • the interface display mode is an automatic clustering mode
  • the smart terminal can determine the clustering information of at least one icon in the second icon set, and the area attribute information of the target icon area, and move the fourth icon in the second icon set In the target icon area, the clustering information of the fourth icon matches the area attribute information.
  • the icons contained in the above-mentioned second icon set may be all icons located in the display screen except the icons contained in all icon areas, or all icons contained in the smart terminal, or all icons located in all icon areas of the display screen. Icons, this application does not limit the specific icons included in the second icon set.
  • the above-mentioned clustering information may be label information of icons, such as “like” or “dislike”, and may also be application attribute information of the application corresponding to the icon, such as "game” or “social”, and the above-mentioned area attribute information may be It is the area identifier of the target icon area, such as "game” or “social”, and may also be the label information of the target icon area, such as “like” or “dislike”, which is not limited in this application.
  • the clustering information of any icon in the second icon set is "game”
  • the area attribute information of the target icon area is "game”
  • the clustering information of any icon matches the area attribute information.
  • FIG. 6e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the second icon set includes icons A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, N , J, K, L, and M
  • the smart terminal can display at least one icon in the second icon set on the display interface 632, and when the user performs an interface switching operation on the display interface 632, the smart terminal can respond to the interface switching operation performed by the user , to obtain the display interface 633
  • the interface display mode of the display interface 633 can be an automatic clustering mode, taking the icon area identified by the area identifier "game" in the display interface 633 as the target icon area as an example, assuming that the target icon area determined by the smart terminal
  • the area attribute information of is "game”
  • the clustering information of icons J, K, L and M in the second icon set is "social”
  • the clustering information of icons A, C, D, E and F is "game”
  • the smart terminal After determining the target theme mode of the smart terminal, the smart terminal can use the target theme mode as the target display mode, and process the icons in the target icon area according to the target display mode. Icons in the icon area are processed.
  • the smart terminal may determine the icon in the target icon area that matches the target display mode, and display the determined icon in a preset manner.
  • the above-mentioned displaying the determined icon in a preset manner may refer to: displaying the determined icon on the display screen or in the target icon area, and not displaying all icons in the target icon area except the above-mentioned determined icon ;
  • the above-mentioned displaying the determined icons in a preset manner may also refer to: differentially displaying the determined icons and the icons in the target icon area except the above-mentioned determined icons; the above-mentioned displaying the determined icons in a preset manner may also refer to Yes: display the determined icon in the preset target icon area, and the present application does not limit the specific implementation manner of displaying the determined icon in a preset manner.
  • the above-mentioned differential display may refer to a differential display of brightness, or may refer to a differential display of a logo, which is not limited in this application.
  • the differentiated display of brightness may refer to highlighting the determined icon, so as to realize the differentiated display of the determined icon and the icon other than the above determined icon in the target icon area;
  • the differentiated display of the logo may refer to Differentially displaying the determined icons and the determined icons in the target icon area through different identifications, where the identifications may refer to numbers or letters.
  • the aforementioned preset target icon area may refer to the most recently generated icon area (that is, the icon area whose difference between the generation time and the current system time is less than the preset duration), or may refer to the historical icon area (that is, the generated The difference between the time and the current system time is equal to or greater than the icon area of the preset duration), which is not limited in this application.
  • the above-mentioned preset time length may be 5 seconds (s) or 2 minutes (min) or the like.
  • FIG. 6f is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Area 635 is taken as an example of the target icon area, assuming that the target theme mode is conference mode, the application attribute information or the corresponding label information of the application corresponding to icon J and icon M is "outdoor", and the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon K and icon L information or the corresponding label information is "meeting", then the smart terminal can determine that the icon K and icon L in the target icon area are icons that match the target theme mode (that is, the meeting mode), and can display the icon K and icon L on the display screen.
  • the target theme mode that is, the meeting mode
  • the smart terminal can display the icon K and the icon L in the icon sub-area of the icon area 637 in the display interface 636, or cancel the display of the target icon area, and display the icon K and the icon L in a blank space.
  • Icon display positions such as icon display position 638 and icon display position 639, that is, icon K and icon L are not displayed in any icon area, in other words, icon K and icon L are directly displayed on the display screen of the smart terminal.
  • the smart terminal can trigger a third startup instruction on the fifth icon in the target icon area, and if the fifth icon matches the target display mode, the smart terminal can respond to the third startup instruction and start the application corresponding to the fifth icon, And/or, if the fifth icon does not match the target display mode, the smart terminal may not start the application corresponding to the fifth icon.
  • the smart terminal can trigger a third start instruction on the fifth icon in the target icon area, where the fifth icon is the fifth icon in the target icon area. any of the icons.
  • the third starting operation may be a user's click operation on the fifth icon, or an application selection operation performed by the user in an application editing menu corresponding to the fifth icon.
  • the user can long press the fifth icon, and the smart terminal responds to the user's long press operation and displays the application editing menu corresponding to the fifth icon.
  • the application editing menu includes options for starting. An application selection operation is performed, thereby performing a third launch operation on the fifth icon.
  • FIG. 6g is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the icon area identified by the area identifier "social" in the display interface 640 is taken as the target icon area as an example, assuming that the target The theme mode is a meeting, and the target theme mode is used as the target display mode, and the icon L is used as the fifth icon.
  • the smart terminal can trigger the second icon L on the icon L.
  • the smart terminal can respond to the third start instruction , start the application corresponding to the icon L, then the smart terminal can display the application interface of the application corresponding to the icon L on the display interface 641; assuming that the application attribute information or the corresponding label information of the application corresponding to the icon L is "riding", also That is to say, if the icon L does not match the target display mode (that is, the conference mode), the smart terminal may not start the application corresponding to the icon L.
  • the target icon area and the target display mode can be determined.
  • the target display mode can be the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located or the target theme mode of the smart terminal, and the target is displayed according to the determined target display mode. Icons in the icon area are processed. If the target display modes are different, the icons in the target icon area may be processed differently according to the different target display modes, so as to achieve the goal of performing diversified management and operations on the icons in the target icon area.
  • the smart terminal can determine the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located, and use the determined interface display mode as the target display mode, that is to say, the smart terminal can follow the determined interface display mode for the target icon area. icon for processing.
  • the smart terminal may process the icons in the target icon area differently according to the determined interface display mode, so as to perform diversified management and operations on the icons in the target icon area.
  • the smart terminal can determine the target theme mode, and use the determined target theme mode as the target display mode, that is, the smart terminal can process the icons in the target icon area according to the determined target theme mode.
  • the smart terminal may process the icons in the target icon area differently according to the target theme mode, so as to perform diversified management and operations on the icons in the target icon area.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of an icon processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application. This method can be applied to smart terminals such as mobile terminals or fixed terminals. Take the mobile terminal as an example for description.
  • the icon processing method shown in this embodiment includes:
  • the mobile terminal may include at least one icon area, wherein each icon area in the at least one icon area may refer to a large folder or an application card or the like. It can be understood that the icon area in the mobile terminal includes at least one icon sub-area, and any icon sub-area in the at least one icon sub-area can display any icon in the icon area.
  • different icon areas may have different area identifications, wherein the area identifications of different icon areas may be set by the mobile terminal or by the user.
  • the icons contained in the icon area may refer to one or more of the following: an icon used to indicate an application (that is, an icon corresponding to the application), an icon used to indicate an application function (optionally a collection icon or scan icon, etc.), an icon used to indicate the function of the mobile terminal (optionally a flashlight icon or a setting icon, etc.), an icon used to indicate content (optionally an icon for notification information or an icon for conversation content, etc.).
  • the icon area as an example referring to a large folder
  • the icon in the icon area as an example for indicating an application.
  • the difference between the icon area and the small folder is that the user can operate the icon displayed in the icon sub-area of the icon area or the application corresponding to the icon without expanding the icon area.
  • the user can click any icon displayed in each icon sub-area of the icon area without expanding the icon area, and the mobile terminal can respond to the user's click operation and activate the icon indicated by the user's click operation. corresponding application.
  • the mobile terminal may include a lock icon area, and the user can only perform a start operation on icons in the lock icon area to start a program corresponding to the icon indicated by the start operation, such as start an application corresponding to the icon.
  • a start operation on icons in the lock icon area to start a program corresponding to the icon indicated by the start operation, such as start an application corresponding to the icon.
  • the user cannot perform other operations on the icons in the locked icon area, such as operations such as moving out or uninstalling.
  • the mobile terminal may use any icon area on the display screen as the target icon area.
  • the mobile terminal may respond to the user's switching operation and use the icon area on which the switching operation acts as the target icon area.
  • the mobile terminal may display the mode editing interface in response to the mode editing operation performed by the user, and when the user performs a mode selection operation on the mode editing interface, the mobile terminal may In response to the mode selection operation performed by the user, the icon area on which the above mode editing operation is applied is used as the target icon area.
  • the mobile terminal may respond to the user's merging operation and use the icon area generated by the merging operation as the target icon area; If the operation generates an icon area, then the mobile terminal may respond to the user's movement operation, and use the icon area generated by the movement operation as the target icon area.
  • the above-mentioned target display mode may be any display mode in the preset display mode set, and the preset display mode set may be set by the mobile terminal or by the user.
  • the specific content is not limited.
  • the above-mentioned target display mode may include target background information or target display form, wherein the target background information may refer to any background information in the preset display mode set, and the target display form may refer to any background information in the preset display mode set. any display format.
  • the target display mode may include the target background information; when the preset display mode set includes at least one display form, the target display mode may include the target display form.
  • background information may refer to background color or background pattern.
  • background information may be "background color gray”, “background color blue” or “background color red” etc.
  • display form may refer to The shape of the area frame that forms the icon area.
  • the display shape can be "circle", “rectangle” or "rounded rectangle".
  • the icons displayed in the icon sub-areas of the target icon area are not completely the same.
  • the target icon area includes icons A, B, C, D, E, and F
  • the number of icon sub-areas in the target icon area is 4, and the icons displayed in the icon sub-areas of the target icon area include icon A , B, C, and D
  • the icons displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area may include icons A, D, E, and F.
  • the icons displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area are updated from icons A, B, C, and D to icons A, D , E and F, that is, when the display modes corresponding to the target icon area are different, the icons displayed in the icon sub-areas of the target icon area are not completely the same.
  • the mobile terminal can trigger a mode editing command in the target icon area, and output a mode editing interface in response to the mode editing command; and trigger a mode selection command on the mode editing interface, and respond to the mode selection command to select a display mode in the preset display mode set, and Use the selected display mode as the target display mode.
  • the above-mentioned mode editing interface contains at least one display mode in the preset display mode set.
  • the preset display mode set may include at least one background information, and may also include at least one display form.
  • the mobile terminal may trigger a mode editing command in the target icon area, and output a mode editing interface in response to the mode editing command.
  • the above mode editing operation may refer to the user's long-press operation on the target icon area, or may refer to the user's continuous clicking operation on the target icon area. This application does not limit the specific implementation of the mode editing operation.
  • a mode editing instruction is triggered in the target icon area, and the target display mode is determined in response to the mode editing instruction. If the user performs a mode editing operation on the target icon area, optionally, the mode editing instruction includes at least one of gesture operations, including a drag operation on the target icon area, a multi-finger touch operation, and a sliding operation. The mode editing operation determines the target display mode.
  • the mobile terminal may trigger a mode editing command in the target icon area, and respond to the mode editing
  • the instruction outputs a mode editing interface (ie, the display interface 812 ), and the mode editing interface includes at least one display mode in the preset display mode set.
  • the mobile terminal may trigger a mode selection command on the mode editing interface, respond to the mode selection command to select a display mode in the preset display mode set, and use the selected display mode as The target display mode, wherein the display mode selected by the mode selection instruction may refer to the display mode selected by the mode selection operation performed by the user.
  • the above-mentioned mode selection operation may refer to the user's click operation on the mode editing interface, that is, the above-mentioned selected display mode may refer to the display mode on which the user performs the click operation.
  • the above-mentioned mode selection operation may also refer to the user's sliding operation on the mode editing interface. This sliding operation can slide any display mode contained in the mode editing interface to the display mode determination area, that is to say, the above-mentioned selected display mode can be Refers to the display mode in the above-mentioned display mode determination area.
  • the present application does not limit the specific implementation manner of the mode selection operation.
  • the above target display mode may include target background information or target display form.
  • the preset display mode set includes at least one piece of background information
  • the target display mode may include the target background information
  • the target background information is the background information selected by the mode selection operation performed by the user.
  • the set of preset display modes includes at least one display form
  • the target display mode may include the target display form
  • the The target display form is the display form selected by the mode selection operation performed by the user.
  • the mode editing interface includes at least one display mode in the preset display mode set. If the user performs a click operation on the mode editing interface, that is to say , when the user performs a mode selection operation on the mode editing interface, the mobile terminal can trigger a mode selection command on the mode editing interface, and respond to the mode selection command to select a display mode from the preset display mode set. Assuming that the selected display mode is a display form in the preset display mode set (that is, "rounded rectangle"), then the mobile terminal may use the selected display mode as the target display mode.
  • the mobile terminal may trigger a switching instruction in the target icon area; and use the display mode indicated by the switching instruction as the target display mode.
  • the mobile terminal may trigger a switching instruction on the target icon area.
  • the above switching operation may refer to the user's sliding operation on the target icon area, or may refer to the user's continuous clicking operation on the target icon area. The present application does not limit the specific implementation of the switching operation.
  • the display interface 816 includes an icon area 817.
  • the target icon area as the icon area 817 as an example, if the user performs a sliding operation on the target icon area, that is, if the user slides the target icon area If the switching operation is performed in the area, then the mobile terminal can trigger the switching instruction in the target icon area.
  • the target icon area includes an operation control
  • the mobile terminal can trigger a pull instruction or a pull-down command on the operation control in the target icon area, and if the pull-down distance indicated by the pull-down command is greater than a preset distance threshold, trigger switching in the target icon area instruction.
  • the mobile terminal can trigger a pull-down command in the target icon area, and if the pull-down distance indicated by the pull-down command is greater than the preset distance threshold, then the target icon area A switching instruction is triggered, wherein the pull-down distance indicated by the pull-down instruction may refer to the pull-down distance indicated by the pull-down operation.
  • the above-mentioned preset distance threshold may be set by the mobile terminal, or may be set by the user as desired.
  • the preset distance threshold may be 8 millimeters (mm) or 2 centimeters (cm) or the like.
  • the above-mentioned operation control may refer to a pull-down handle, or may refer to a button in a pullable state, which is not limited in this application.
  • the display interface 820 includes an icon area 821.
  • the target icon area contains operation controls.
  • the mobile terminal can trigger the pull-down command on the operation control in the target icon area, assuming that the preset distance threshold is 5 mm, and the pull-down distance indicated by the pull-down command is 6 mm, that is to say, the pull-down distance indicated by the pull-down command is greater than the preset distance. If the distance threshold is set, then the mobile terminal can trigger a switching instruction in the target icon area.
  • the icons displayed in the icon sub-areas of the target icon area are not completely the same.
  • the target icon can be obtained from the icons contained in the target icon area, wherein the target icon is the same as the icon displayed in the target icon area
  • the icons in the subareas are not identical, and the target icon may be displayed in the icon subarea of the target icon area.
  • the target display mode may include target display content.
  • the target display mode may include the target display content, and the target display content may be at least one icon content. Then, in response to the switching instruction, the mobile terminal switches the display mode corresponding to the target icon area to the target display mode, which may be understood as: switching the display content corresponding to the target icon area to the target display content.
  • the object display mode may include object background information.
  • the target display mode may include target background information, and the target background information may be any background information in the preset display mode set. Then, in response to the switching instruction, the mobile terminal switches the display mode corresponding to the target icon area to the target display mode, which may be understood as: switching the background information corresponding to the target icon area to the target background information.
  • the object display mode may include an object display form.
  • the target display mode may include a target display mode, and the target display mode may be any display mode in the preset display mode set. Then, in response to the switching instruction, the mobile terminal switches the display mode corresponding to the target icon area to the target display mode, which can be understood as: switching the display form corresponding to the target icon area to the target display form.
  • the target display mode includes target background information
  • the mobile terminal can display the target icon area according to the target display mode. It can be understood that when the mobile terminal displays the target icon area according to the target display mode, it can display the target icon area according to the target background information, that is, the mobile terminal can update the background information of the target icon area to the target background information.
  • FIG. 8d is a schematic diagram of another icon area provided by the embodiment of the present application
  • 826 is a display interface of the mobile terminal
  • the display interface 826 includes an icon area 827.
  • the target icon area is the icon area 827 as an example.
  • the mobile terminal can display the target icon area according to the target display mode (ie target background information), thereby obtaining a display interface 828 .
  • the display interface 828 includes a target icon area (i.e. icon area 829) whose display mode is the target display mode, wherein the background information of the icon area 829 is "background color gray", that is, the background color of the icon area 829 is gray.
  • the target display mode includes a target display form
  • the mobile terminal can display the target icon area according to the target display mode. It can be understood that when the mobile terminal displays the target icon area according to the target display mode, it can display the target icon area according to the target display form, that is, the mobile terminal can update the display form of the target icon area to the target display form. form.
  • the display interface 812 includes an icon area 813.
  • the target icon area as the icon area 813 as an example, when the target display mode includes a target display form, and the target display form refers to "rounded corners"
  • the mobile terminal can display the target icon area according to the target display mode (ie, the target display form), so as to obtain the display interface 814.
  • the display interface 814 includes a target icon area (i.e., the icon area 815) whose display mode is the target display mode, and the display form of the icon area 815 is a "rounded rectangle", that is to say, the shape of the area frame forming the icon area 815 is a circle corner rectangle.
  • the specific implementation process that the icons displayed in the icon sub-areas of the target icon area are not completely the same may be as follows: the number of all icons contained in the target icon area satisfies the first A number of icons are used as target icons, the first number is the number of all icon sub-areas in the target icon area, and when the display modes corresponding to the target icon areas are different, the icons displayed in the icon sub-areas of the target icon area The icons are not identical. Based on this, the target icon may be displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area.
  • the display interface 816 includes an icon area 817.
  • the target icon area includes icons J, K, L, M, O, P, Q, R And S
  • the target icon area contains four icon sub-areas, that is, the number of all icon sub-areas in the target icon area is 4, that is to say, the first number can be 4, then the mobile terminal can be included in the target icon area Get 4 icons from all the icons as the target icon.
  • the target icons include icons O, P, Q, and R
  • the target icons are not exactly the same as the icons (i.e. icons J, K, L, and M) displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area
  • the moving The terminal may display the target icon in the icon sub-area of the target icon area (ie icon area 819).
  • the target icon area includes icons in the locked state, and the icons in the locked state are displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area; among all the icons contained in the target icon area, the icons whose number satisfies the first number are acquired as
  • the specific implementation process of the target icon can be: determine the second quantity, the second quantity is the quantity of other icon subregions except the icon subregion displaying the icon in the locked state in all the icon subregions of the target icon region; Among all the icons included in the icon area except the above-mentioned icons in the locked state, the second number of icons is acquired as the target icon. Then, the mobile terminal can display the target icon in the icon sub-area of the target icon area.
  • the display interface 820 includes an icon area 821.
  • the icon area 821 as the target icon area as an example, the target icon area includes icons J, K, L, M, O, P, Q, R and S, and the target icon area includes four icon sub-areas, that is, the number of all icon sub-areas in the target icon area is four.
  • the icon L is an icon in the locked state in the target icon area
  • the icon L in the locked state is displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area
  • the number of icon sub-areas of the icon in the locked state is 1,
  • the number of other icon sub-areas in all icon sub-areas of the target icon area except the icon sub-area displaying the icon in the locked state is three.
  • the mobile terminal can determine that the second number is 3, and can obtain an icon with a quantity of 3 as the target icon from all icons contained in the target icon area except the above-mentioned icon in the locked state (ie icon L), that is to say , the mobile terminal may acquire 3 icons among the icons J, K, M, O, P, Q, R, and S as target icons. Assuming that the target icon includes icons O, P and Q, the mobile terminal can display the target icon in the icon sub-area of the target icon area (i.e. icon area 823). It can be understood that the mobile terminal still displays the icon L on the target icon In the icon sub-area of the area, and the icon sub-area of the target icon area where the icon L is located remains unchanged.
  • the mobile terminal may display at least one target icon area according to the target display mode.
  • the user can perform an area selection operation on multiple icon areas on the display screen, and the mobile terminal responds to the area selection operation performed by the user and uses the selected icon area as the target icon area.
  • the above area selection operation may refer to a trajectory generation operation performed by the user on the display screen, so that the icon area within the track indicated by the trajectory generation operation is used as the selected icon area; optionally, the above area selection operation It can also refer to the user's selection operation in the area selection interface.
  • the user can perform a long press operation on the blank area of the display screen, and the mobile terminal responds to the long press operation performed by the user.
  • the display area selection interface can contain all icons in the mobile terminal area, then the user can perform a selection operation on the area selection interface to obtain the selected icon area. This application does not limit the specific implementation of the area selection operation.
  • the mobile terminal may display all icon areas on the display screen according to the target display mode. For example, assuming that the mobile terminal includes an icon area A and an icon area B, and the target icon area is the icon area A, then after determining the target display mode corresponding to the target icon area, the mobile terminal can perform the target icon area according to the target display mode. Display, and display the icon area B according to the target display mode; optionally, the target display modes of different target icon areas can be the same or different, and the user can edit different target icon areas separately or collectively, or set the target according to the system default Display mode display.
  • the mobile terminal may display at least one icon in at least one target icon area according to the target display mode. It can be understood that the mobile terminal can determine the icon parameters such as the icon size, icon shape, and icon color of the icons in the target icon area according to the target display mode, so as to set the target icon area according to the determined icon parameters such as the icon size, icon shape, and icon color. At least one of the icons in will be displayed.
  • the target icon area may refer to the icon area 813
  • the target display mode may refer to "rounded rectangle”
  • the mobile terminal may display all objects in the target icon area according to the target display mode. The icon is displayed to obtain a display interface 814, and the icon shape of the icon in the target icon area (ie icon area 815) in the display interface 814 is "rounded rectangle".
  • the mobile terminal may determine at least one icon and display the at least one icon according to the target display mode, where the at least one icon is one or more icons among all the icons included in the target icon area.
  • the mobile terminal may use the icon displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area as the above at least one icon, or may use the icon or all icons selected by the user as the above at least one icon, which is not limited in this application.
  • the object display mode may include an object display order, and the object display order may indicate the order of icons displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area, then the mobile terminal may display the icon sub-area of the target icon area in accordance with the target display order icon in the display.
  • the user can press and hold the target icon area, and the mobile terminal displays an icon selection interface in response to the long press operation performed by the user.
  • the icon selection interface includes all icons in the target icon area, so the user can perform a selection operation on the icon selection interface,
  • the mobile terminal takes the icon on which the user performs the first selection operation as the first icon in the target display sequence, and takes the icon on which the user performs the second selection operation as the target display sequence until the number of selection operations performed by the user reaches the total number of icon sub-regions in the target icon area, or until the operation is completed on the icon selection interface, so that the mobile terminal determines the target display sequence.
  • the user can also perform continuous clicking operations on the icon selection interface, and the mobile terminal responds to the continuous clicking operations performed by the user, and uses the icon on the Mth continuous clicking operation as the Mth icon in the target display sequence, where M is is a positive integer, and M is less than or equal to the number of icon sub-areas contained in the target icon area, so that the mobile terminal determines the target display sequence.
  • M is is a positive integer
  • M is less than or equal to the number of icon sub-areas contained in the target icon area, so that the mobile terminal determines the target display sequence.
  • the present application does not limit the specific manner of determining the target display sequence.
  • the mobile terminal can display the first icon in the target icon area Display icon C in the area and icon A in the second icon subarea of the target icon area.
  • the mobile terminal can display the target icon area according to the target display mode. If the target display modes are different, the target icon area can be displayed according to different target display modes, thereby realizing the diversity of the target icon area. Or display in an interesting way, so that users can adjust the display mode corresponding to the target icon area according to their wishes, so as to improve user stickiness.
  • the mobile terminal can display the mode editing interface, and determine the target display mode corresponding to the target icon area according to the mode selection instruction triggered on the mode editing interface. If the display modes selected by the mode selection instruction are different, then the target display mode determined by the mobile terminal The modes are different, which is convenient for users to set the target display mode according to their wishes.
  • the mobile terminal may trigger a switching instruction in the target icon area, so that the display mode indicated by the switching instruction is used as the target display mode, so that the user can adjust the display mode corresponding to the target icon area.
  • the present application also provides an intelligent terminal.
  • the intelligent terminal includes a memory and a processor, and a computer program is stored in the memory.
  • the computer program is executed by the processor, the steps of the method in any of the foregoing embodiments are implemented.
  • the present application also provides a computer storage medium, on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of the method in any of the foregoing embodiments are implemented.
  • the embodiments of the smart terminal and the computer storage medium provided in the present application may include all the technical features of any of the above embodiments, and the expansion and explanation of the description are basically the same as those of the embodiments of the above method, and will not be repeated here.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer program code, and when the computer program code is run on the computer, the computer is made to execute the methods in the above various possible implementation manners.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, including a memory and a processor.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the device installed with the chip executes the above various possible implementation modes. Methods.
  • Units in the device in the embodiment of the present application may be combined, divided and deleted according to actual needs.
  • the methods of the above embodiments can be implemented by means of software plus a necessary general-purpose hardware platform, and of course also by hardware, but in many cases the former is better implementation.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence or in other words, the part that contributes to the prior art, and the computer software product is stored in one of the above storage media (such as ROM/RAM, magnetic CD, CD), including several instructions to make a terminal device (which may be a mobile phone, computer, server, controlled terminal, or network device, etc.) execute the method of each embodiment of the present application.
  • all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • a computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable apparatus.
  • Computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer storage medium to another, for example, from a website site, computer, server, or data center via wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, Digital Subscriber Line) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center.
  • the computer storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device including a server, a data center, and the like integrated with one or more available media.
  • Usable media may be magnetic media, (eg, floppy disk, memory disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, Solid State Disk (SSD)), among others.

Abstract

An icon display method, an intelligent terminal and a storage medium. The icon display method comprises: determining a target scenario mode of a target icon area (S10); acquiring at least one icon in the target icon area (S20); and generating or determining a scenarized interface according to the target scenario mode, and displaying the at least one icon in the scenarized interface (S30). By means of the method, at least one icon in a target icon area can be displayed in a scenarized interface, and if target scenario modes are different, the at least one icon in the target icon area can be displayed in different scenarized interfaces, thereby displaying the icon in the target icon area in a diversified or interesting manner.

Description

图标的显示方法、智能终端及存储介质Icon display method, smart terminal and storage medium
本申请要求于2021年9月28日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202111144916.0、申请名称为“图标的显示方法、智能终端及存储介质”、申请号为202111147514.6、申请名称为“图标的处理方法、智能终端及存储介质”、申请号为202111156522.7、申请名称为“图标处理方法、智能终端及存储介质”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application is required to be submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office of China on September 28, 2021, the application number is 202111144916.0, the application name is "icon display method, intelligent terminal and storage medium", the application number is 202111147514.6, the application name is "icon processing Method, intelligent terminal and storage medium”, the priority of the Chinese patent application with application number 202111156522.7 and application name “icon processing method, intelligent terminal and storage medium”, the entire content of which is incorporated in this application by reference.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及电子技术领域,具体涉及图标的显示方法、智能终端及存储介质。The present application relates to the field of electronic technology, in particular to an icon display method, an intelligent terminal and a storage medium.
背景技术Background technique
一些实现中,用户若要对于图标区域中的图标的显示,通常展开图标区域以显示图标区域中的图标,导致图标区域中的图标的显示方式较为单调。基于此,如何多样性或者趣味性地显示图标区域中的图标,成为了一个亟待解决的影响用户体验的问题。In some implementations, if the user wants to display the icons in the icon area, he usually expands the icon area to display the icons in the icon area, resulting in a monotonous display mode of the icons in the icon area. Based on this, how to display icons in the icon area in a variety or interesting manner has become an urgent problem that affects user experience.
前面的叙述在于提供一般的背景信息,并不一定构成现有技术。The foregoing description is provided to provide general background information and does not necessarily constitute prior art.
申请内容application content
针对上述技术问题,本申请提供一种图标的显示方法、智能终端及存储介质,如果目标场景模式不同,那么可以将目标图标区域中的至少一个图标显示在不同的场景化界面中,从而对目标图标区域中的图标进行多样性或者趣味性地显示。In view of the above technical problems, the present application provides an icon display method, an intelligent terminal and a storage medium. If the target scene modes are different, at least one icon in the target icon area can be displayed in a different scene interface, so that the target The icons in the icon area are displayed in a variety or interesting manner.
为解决上述技术问题,本申请提供一种图标的显示方法,该方法包括:In order to solve the above technical problems, the present application provides a method for displaying icons, the method comprising:
确定目标图标区域的目标场景模式;Determine the target scene mode of the target icon area;
获取目标图标区域中的至少一个图标;Obtain at least one icon in the target icon area;
按照目标场景模式生成或确定场景化界面,并在场景化界面中显示至少一个图标。Generate or determine a scene interface according to the target scene mode, and display at least one icon in the scene interface.
可选地,本申请的图标的显示方法,应用于智能终端。通过上述技术方案,可以将目标图标区域中的至少一个图标显示在场景化界面中,如果目标场景模式不同,那么可以将目标图标区域中的至少一个图标显示在不同的场景化界面中,从而对目标图标区域中的图标进行多样性或者趣味性地显示。Optionally, the icon display method of the present application is applied to a smart terminal. Through the above technical solution, at least one icon in the target icon area can be displayed in the scene-based interface, if the target scene modes are different, then at least one icon in the target icon area can be displayed in different scene-based interfaces, so as to The icons in the target icon area are displayed in variety or interest.
本申请还提供一种图标的处理方法,该方法包括:The present application also provides a method for processing icons, the method including:
确定目标图标区域,以及目标显示模式,目标显示模式为目标图标区域所处区域界面的界面显示模式或智能终端的目标主题模式;Determine the target icon area and the target display mode, the target display mode is the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located or the target theme mode of the smart terminal;
按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理。Icons in the target icon area are processed according to the target display mode.
可选地,本申请的图标的处理方法,应用于智能终端。通过该方法,可以确定目标显示模式,如果目标显示模式不同,那么可以按照不同的目标显示模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行不同的处理,从而对目标图标区域中的图标进行多样化的管理和操作。Optionally, the icon processing method of the present application is applied to a smart terminal. Through this method, the target display mode can be determined. If the target display modes are different, the icons in the target icon area can be processed differently according to different target display modes, so that the icons in the target icon area can be managed and managed in a variety of ways. operate.
本申请还提供一种图标处理方法,该方法包括:The present application also provides an icon processing method, the method comprising:
确定目标图标区域,以及目标图标区域对应的目标显示模式;Determine the target icon area and the target display mode corresponding to the target icon area;
按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域进行显示。Display the target icon area according to the target display mode.
可选地,本申请的图标处理方法,应用于智能终端。通过该方法,可以按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域进行显示,如果目标显示模式不同,那么可以按照不同的目标显示模式对目标图标区域进行显示,从而实现对目标图标区域进行多样性或者趣味性地显示。Optionally, the icon processing method of the present application is applied to a smart terminal. Through this method, the target icon area can be displayed according to the target display mode. If the target display modes are different, then the target icon area can be displayed according to different target display modes, so as to achieve a variety or interesting display of the target icon area. show.
本申请还提供一种智能终端,包括:存储器、处理器,其中,所述存储器上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被所述处理器执行时实现如上述任一方法的步骤。The present application also provides an intelligent terminal, including: a memory and a processor, wherein a computer program is stored in the memory, and when the computer program is executed by the processor, the steps of any one of the above methods are implemented.
本申请还提供一种计算机存储介质,所述存储介质存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如上述任一 方法的步骤。The present application also provides a computer storage medium, the storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of any one of the above methods are realized.
附图说明Description of drawings
此处的附图被并入说明书中并构成本说明书的一部分,示出了符合本申请的实施例,并与说明书一起用于解释本申请的原理。为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案,下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,对于本领域普通技术人员而言,在不付出创造性劳动性的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated in and constitute a part of this specification, illustrate embodiments consistent with the application and together with the description serve to explain the principles of the application. In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the accompanying drawings that need to be used in the description of the embodiments will be briefly introduced below. Obviously, for those of ordinary skill in the art, the Under the premise, other drawings can also be obtained based on these drawings.
图1为实现本申请各个实施例的一种移动终端的硬件结构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信网络系统架构图;FIG. 2 is a system architecture diagram of a communication network provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种图标的显示方法的流程示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of an icon display method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4a为本申请实施例提供的一种图标的示意图;Fig. 4a is a schematic diagram of an icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图4b为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图;Fig. 4b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图4c为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图;Fig. 4c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图4d为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图;Fig. 4d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图4e为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图;Fig. 4e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种图标的处理方法的流程示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a method for processing icons provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6a为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图;Fig. 6a is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6b为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图;Fig. 6b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6c为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图;Fig. 6c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6d为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图;Fig. 6d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6e为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图;Fig. 6e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6f为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图;Fig. 6f is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6g为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图;Fig. 6g is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种图标处理方法的流程示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of an icon processing method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8a为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图;Fig. 8a is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8b为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图;Fig. 8b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8c为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图;Fig. 8c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8d为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图。Fig. 8d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.
本申请目的的实现、功能特点及优点将结合实施例,参照附图做进一步说明。通过上述附图,已示出本申请明确的实施例,后文中将有更详细的描述。这些附图和文字描述并不是为了通过任何方式限制本申请构思的范围,而是通过参考特定实施例为本领域技术人员说明本申请的概念。The realization, functional features and advantages of the present application will be further described in conjunction with the embodiments and with reference to the accompanying drawings. By means of the above drawings, specific embodiments of the present application have been shown, which will be described in more detail hereinafter. These drawings and text descriptions are not intended to limit the scope of the concept of the application in any way, but to illustrate the concept of the application for those skilled in the art by referring to specific embodiments.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
这里将详细地对示例性实施例进行说明,其示例表示在附图中。下面的描述涉及附图时,除非另有表示,不同附图中的相同数字表示相同或相似的要素。以下示例性实施例中所描述的实施方式并不代表与本申请相一致的所有实施方式。相反,它们仅是与如所附权利要求书中所详述的、本申请的一些方面相一致的装置和方法的例子。Reference will now be made in detail to the exemplary embodiments, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. When the following description refers to the accompanying drawings, the same numerals in different drawings refer to the same or similar elements unless otherwise indicated. The implementations described in the following exemplary embodiments do not represent all implementations consistent with this application. Rather, they are merely examples of apparatuses and methods consistent with aspects of the present application as recited in the appended claims.
需要说明的是,在本文中,术语“包括”、“包含”或者其任何其他变体意在涵盖非排他性的包含,从而使得包括一系列要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置不仅包括那些要素,而且还包括没有明确列出的其他要素,或者是还包括为这种过程、方法、物品或者装置所固有的要素。在没有更多限制的情况下,由语句“包括一个……”限定的要素,并不排除在包括该要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置中还存在另外的相同要素,此外,本申请不同实施例中具有同样命名的部件、特征、要素可能具有相同含义,也可能具有不同含义,其具体含义需以其在该具体实施例中的解释或者进一步结合该具体实施例中上下文进行确定。It should be noted that, in this document, the term "comprising", "comprising" or any other variation thereof is intended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion such that a process, method, article or apparatus comprising a set of elements includes not only those elements, It also includes other elements not expressly listed, or elements inherent in the process, method, article, or device. Without further limitations, an element defined by the phrase "comprising a..." does not exclude the existence of other identical elements in the process, method, article, or device that includes the element. In addition, different implementations of the present application Components, features, and elements with the same name in the example may have the same meaning, or may have different meanings, and the specific meaning shall be determined based on the explanation in the specific embodiment or further combined with the context in the specific embodiment.
应当理解,尽管在本文可能采用术语第一、第二、第三等来描述各种信息,但这些信息不应限于这些术语。这些术语仅用来将同一类型的信息彼此区分开。例如,在不脱离本文范围的情况下,第一信息也可以被称为第二信息,类似地,第二信息也可以被称为第一信息。取决于语境,如在此所使用的词语"如果"可以被解释成为“在……时”或“当……时”或“响应 于确定”。再者,如同在本文中所使用的,单数形式“一”、“一个”和“该”旨在也包括复数形式,除非上下文中有相反的指示。应当进一步理解,术语“包含”、“包括”表明存在所述的特征、步骤、操作、元件、组件、项目、种类、和/或组,但不排除一个或多个其他特征、步骤、操作、元件、组件、项目、种类、和/或组的存在、出现或添加。本申请使用的术语“或”、“和/或”、“包括以下至少一个”等可被解释为包括性的,或意味着任一个或任何组合。例如,“包括以下至少一个:A、B、C”意味着“以下任一个:A;B;C;A和B;A和C;B和C;A和B和C”,再如,“A、B或C”或者“A、B和/或C”意味着“以下任一个:A;B;C;A和B;A和C;B和C;A和B和C”。仅当元件、功能、步骤或操作的组合在某些方式下内在地互相排斥时,才会出现该定义的例外。It should be understood that although the terms first, second, third, etc. may be used herein to describe various information, the information should not be limited to these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish information of the same type from one another. For example, without departing from the scope of this document, first information may also be called second information, and similarly, second information may also be called first information. Depending on the context, the word "if" as used herein may be interpreted as "at" or "when" or "in response to a determination." Furthermore, as used herein, the singular forms "a", "an" and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context indicates otherwise. It should be further understood that the terms "comprising", "comprising" indicate the presence of stated features, steps, operations, elements, components, items, species, and/or groups, but do not exclude one or more other features, steps, operations, The existence, occurrence or addition of an element, component, item, species, and/or group. The terms "or", "and/or", "comprising at least one of" and the like used in this application may be interpreted as inclusive, or mean any one or any combination. For example, "including at least one of the following: A, B, C" means "any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C", another example, " A, B or C" or "A, B and/or C" means "any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C". Exceptions to this definition will only arise when combinations of elements, functions, steps or operations are inherently mutually exclusive in some way.
应该理解的是,虽然本申请实施例中的流程图中的各个步骤按照箭头的指示依次显示,但是这些步骤并不是必然按照箭头指示的顺序依次执行。除非本文中有明确的说明,这些步骤的执行并没有严格的顺序限制,其可以以其他的顺序执行。而且,图中的至少一部分步骤可以包括多个子步骤或者多个阶段,这些子步骤或者阶段并不必然是在同一时刻执行完成,而是可以在不同的时刻执行,其执行顺序也不必然是依次进行,而是可以与其他步骤或者其他步骤的子步骤或者阶段的至少一部分轮流或者交替地执行。It should be understood that although the various steps in the flow chart in the embodiment of the present application are displayed sequentially as indicated by the arrows, these steps are not necessarily executed sequentially in the order indicated by the arrows. Unless otherwise specified herein, there is no strict order restriction on the execution of these steps, and they can be executed in other orders. Moreover, at least some of the steps in the figure may include multiple sub-steps or multiple stages, these sub-steps or stages are not necessarily executed at the same time, but may be executed at different times, and the execution order is not necessarily sequential Instead, it may be performed alternately or alternately with at least a part of other steps or sub-steps or stages of other steps.
取决于语境,如在此所使用的词语“如果”、“若”可以被解释成为“在……时”或“当……时”或“响应于确定”或“响应于检测”。类似地,取决于语境,短语“如果确定”或“如果检测(陈述的条件或事件)”可以被解释成为“当确定时”或“响应于确定”或“当检测(陈述的条件或事件)时”或“响应于检测(陈述的条件或事件)”。Depending on the context, the words "if", "if" as used herein may be interpreted as "at" or "when" or "in response to determining" or "in response to detecting". Similarly, depending on the context, the phrases "if determined" or "if detected (the stated condition or event)" could be interpreted as "when determined" or "in response to the determination" or "when detected (the stated condition or event) )" or "in response to detection of (a stated condition or event)".
需要说明的是,在本文中,采用了诸如S10、S20等步骤代号,其目的是为了更清楚简要地表述相应内容,不构成顺序上的实质性限制,本领域技术人员在具体实施时,可能会先执行S20后执行S10等,但这些均应在本申请的保护范围之内。It should be noted that, in this article, step codes such as S10 and S20 are used, the purpose of which is to express the corresponding content more clearly and concisely, and does not constitute a substantive limitation on the order. Those skilled in the art may, during specific implementation, S20 will be executed first, followed by S10, etc., but these should be within the scope of protection of this application.
应当理解,此处所描述的具体实施例仅仅用以解释本申请,并不用于限定本申请。It should be understood that the specific embodiments described here are only used to explain the present application, and are not intended to limit the present application.
在后续的描述中,使用用于表示元件的诸如“模块”、“部件”或“单元”的后缀仅为了有利于本申请的说明,其本身没有特定的意义。因此,“模块”、“部件”或“单元”可以混合地使用。In the following description, the use of suffixes such as 'module', 'part' or 'unit' for denoting elements is only for facilitating the description of the present application and has no specific meaning by itself. Therefore, 'module', 'part' or 'unit' may be used in combination.
本文中的图标区域的管理方法可以应用于智能终端,智能终端可以以各种形式来实施。例如,本申请中描述的智能终端可以包括诸如手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、便捷式媒体播放器(Portable Media Player,PMP)、导航装置、可穿戴设备、智能手环、计步器等移动终端,以及诸如数字TV、台式计算机等固定终端。The icon area management method herein can be applied to smart terminals, and smart terminals can be implemented in various forms. For example, the smart terminals described in this application may include mobile phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, palmtop computers, personal digital assistants (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), portable media players (Portable Media Player, PMP), navigation devices, Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers, and fixed terminals such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
后续描述中将以移动终端为例进行说明,本领域技术人员将理解的是,除了特别用于移动目的的元件之外,根据本申请的实施方式的构造也能够应用于固定类型的终端。In the subsequent description, a mobile terminal will be taken as an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that, in addition to elements specially used for mobile purposes, the configurations according to the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to fixed-type terminals.
请参阅图1,其为实现本申请各个实施例的一种移动终端的硬件结构示意图,该移动终端100可以包括:RF(Radio Frequency,射频)单元101、WiFi模块102、音频输出单元103、A/V(音频/视频)输入单元104、传感器105、显示单元106、用户输入单元107、接口单元108、存储器109、处理器110、以及电源111等部件。本领域技术人员可以理解,图1中示出的移动终端结构并不构成对移动终端的限定,移动终端可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。Please refer to FIG. 1 , which is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application. The mobile terminal 100 may include: an RF (Radio Frequency, radio frequency) unit 101, a WiFi module 102, an audio output unit 103, an A /V (audio/video) input unit 104, sensor 105, display unit 106, user input unit 107, interface unit 108, memory 109, processor 110, and power supply 111 and other components. Those skilled in the art can understand that the structure of the mobile terminal shown in Figure 1 does not constitute a limitation on the mobile terminal, and the mobile terminal may include more or less components than those shown in the figure, or combine some components, or different components layout.
下面结合图1对移动终端的各个部件进行具体的介绍:Each component of the mobile terminal is specifically introduced below in combination with FIG. 1:
射频单元101可用于收发信息或通话过程中,信号的接收和发送,具体的,将基站的下行信息接收后,给处理器110处理;另外,将上行的数据发送给基站。通常,射频单元101包括但不限于天线、至少一个放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器、双工器等。此外,射频单元101还可以通过无线通信与网络和其他设备通信。上述无线通信可以使用任一通信标准或协议,包括但不限于GSM(Global System of Mobile communication,全球移动通讯系统)、GPRS(General Packet Radio Service,通用分组无线服务)、CDMA2000(Code Division Multiple Access 2000,码分多址2000)、WCDMA(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,宽带码分多址)、TD-SCDMA(Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access,时分同步码分多址)、FDD-LTE(Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution,频分双工长期演进)、TDD-LTE(Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution,分时双工长期演进)和5G等。The radio frequency unit 101 can be used for sending and receiving information or receiving and sending signals during a call. Specifically, after receiving the downlink information of the base station, it is processed by the processor 110; in addition, the uplink data is sent to the base station. Generally, the radio frequency unit 101 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, and the like. In addition, the radio frequency unit 101 can also communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication. The above wireless communication can use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to GSM (Global System of Mobile communication, Global System for Mobile Communications), GPRS (General Packet Radio Service, General Packet Radio Service), CDMA2000 (Code Division Multiple Access 2000 , Code Division Multiple Access 2000), WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access), TD-SCDMA (Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), FDD-LTE (Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, frequency division duplex long-term evolution), TDD-LTE (Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, time-division duplex long-term evolution) and 5G, etc.
WiFi属于短距离无线传输技术,移动终端通过WiFi模块102可以帮助用户收发电子邮件、浏览网页和访问流式媒体等,它为用户提供了无线的宽带互联网访问。虽然图1示出了WiFi模块102,但是可以理解的是,其并不属于移动终端的必须 构成,完全可以根据需要在不改变申请的本质的范围内而省略。WiFi is a short-distance wireless transmission technology. The mobile terminal can help users send and receive emails, browse web pages, and access streaming media through the WiFi module 102, which provides users with wireless broadband Internet access. Although Fig. 1 shows the WiFi module 102, it can be understood that it does not belong to the essential composition of the mobile terminal, and can be completely omitted according to needs within the scope of not changing the essence of the application.
音频输出单元103可以在移动终端100处于呼叫信号接收模式、通话模式、记录模式、语音识别模式、广播接收模式等等模式下时,将射频单元101或WiFi模块102接收的或者在存储器109中存储的音频数据转换成音频信号并且输出为声音。而且,音频输出单元103还可以提供与移动终端100执行的特定功能相关的音频输出(例如,呼叫信号接收声音、消息接收声音等等)。音频输出单元103可以包括扬声器、蜂鸣器等等。The audio output unit 103 can store the audio received by the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 or in the memory 109 when the mobile terminal 100 is in a call signal receiving mode, a call mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, a broadcast receiving mode, or the like. The audio data is converted into an audio signal and output as sound. Also, the audio output unit 103 can also provide audio output related to a specific function performed by the mobile terminal 100 (eg, call signal reception sound, message reception sound, etc.). The audio output unit 103 may include a speaker, a buzzer, and the like.
A/V输入单元104用于接收音频或视频信号。A/V输入单元104可以包括图形处理器(Graphics Processing Unit,GPU)1041和麦克风1042,图形处理器1041对在视频捕获模式或图像捕获模式中由图像捕获装置(如摄像头)获得的静态图片或视频的图像数据进行处理。处理后的图像帧可以显示在显示单元106上。经图形处理器1041处理后的图像帧可以存储在存储器109(或其它存储介质)中或者经由射频单元101或WiFi模块102进行发送。麦克风1042可以在电话通话模式、记录模式、语音识别模式等等运行模式中经由麦克风1042接收声音(音频数据),并且能够将这样的声音处理为音频数据。处理后的音频(语音)数据可以在电话通话模式的情况下转换为可经由射频单元101发送到移动通信基站的格式输出。麦克风1042可以实施各种类型的噪声消除(或抑制)算法以消除(或抑制)在接收和发送音频信号的过程中产生的噪声或者干扰。The A/V input unit 104 is used to receive audio or video signals. The A/V input unit 104 may include a graphics processing unit (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU) 1041 and a microphone 1042, and the graphics processing unit 1041 is used for still pictures or The image data of the video is processed. The processed image frames may be displayed on the display unit 106 . The image frames processed by the graphics processor 1041 may be stored in the memory 109 (or other storage media) or sent via the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 . The microphone 1042 can receive sound (audio data) via the microphone 1042 in a phone call mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, and the like operating modes, and can process such sound as audio data. The processed audio (voice) data can be converted into a format transmittable to a mobile communication base station via the radio frequency unit 101 for output in case of a phone call mode. The microphone 1042 may implement various types of noise cancellation (or suppression) algorithms to cancel (or suppress) noise or interference generated in the process of receiving and transmitting audio signals.
移动终端100还包括至少一种传感器105,比如光传感器、运动传感器以及其他传感器。具体地,光传感器包括环境光传感器及接近传感器,可选地,环境光传感器可根据环境光线的明暗来调节显示面板1061的亮度,接近传感器可在移动终端100移动到耳边时,关闭显示面板1061和/或背光。作为运动传感器的一种,加速计传感器可检测各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小,静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向,可用于识别手机姿态的应用(比如横竖屏切换、相关游戏、磁力计姿态校准)、振动识别相关功能(比如计步器、敲击)等;至于手机还可配置的指纹传感器、压力传感器、虹膜传感器、分子传感器、陀螺仪、气压计、湿度计、温度计、红外线传感器等其他传感器,在此不再赘述。The mobile terminal 100 also includes at least one sensor 105, such as a light sensor, a motion sensor, and other sensors. Specifically, the light sensor includes an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor. Optionally, the ambient light sensor can adjust the brightness of the display panel 1061 according to the brightness of the ambient light, and the proximity sensor can turn off the display panel when the mobile terminal 100 moves to the ear. 1061 and/or backlight. As a kind of motion sensor, the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in various directions (generally three axes), and can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity when it is stationary, and can be used to identify the application of mobile phone posture (such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, related Games, magnetometer attitude calibration), vibration recognition related functions (such as pedometer, tap), etc.; as for mobile phones, fingerprint sensors, pressure sensors, iris sensors, molecular sensors, gyroscopes, barometers, hygrometers, Other sensors such as thermometers and infrared sensors will not be described in detail here.
显示单元106用于显示由用户输入的信息或提供给用户的信息。显示单元106可包括显示面板1061,可以采用液晶显示器(Liquid Crystal Display,LCD)、有机发光二极管(Organic Light-Emitting Diode,OLED)等形式来配置显示面板1061。The display unit 106 is used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user. The display unit 106 may include a display panel 1061, and the display panel 1061 may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display, LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (Organic Light-Emitting Diode, OLED), or the like.
用户输入单元107可用于接收输入的数字或字符信息,以及产生与移动终端的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。具体地,用户输入单元107可包括触控面板1071以及其他输入设备1072。触控面板1071,也称为触摸屏,可收集用户在其上或附近的触摸操作(比如用户使用手指、触笔等任何适合的物体或附件在触控面板1071上或在触控面板1071附近的操作),并根据预先设定的程式驱动相应的连接装置。触控面板1071可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。可选地,触摸检测装置检测用户的触摸方位,并检测触摸操作带来的信号,将信号传送给触摸控制器;触摸控制器从触摸检测装置上接收触摸信息,并将它转换成触点坐标,再送给处理器110,并能接收处理器110发来的命令并加以执行。此外,可以采用电阻式、电容式、红外线以及表面声波等多种类型实现触控面板1071。除了触控面板1071,用户输入单元107还可以包括其他输入设备1072。具体地,其他输入设备1072可以包括但不限于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆等中的一种或多种,具体此处不做限定。The user input unit 107 can be used to receive input numbers or character information, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile terminal. Specifically, the user input unit 107 may include a touch panel 1071 and other input devices 1072 . The touch panel 1071, also referred to as a touch screen, can collect touch operations of the user on or near it (for example, the user uses any suitable object or accessory such as a finger or a stylus on the touch panel 1071 or near the touch panel 1071). operation), and drive the corresponding connection device according to the preset program. The touch panel 1071 may include two parts, a touch detection device and a touch controller. Optionally, the touch detection device detects the user's touch orientation, detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives touch information from the touch detection device and converts it into contact coordinates , and then sent to the processor 110, and can receive the command sent by the processor 110 and execute it. In addition, the touch panel 1071 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave. In addition to the touch panel 1071 , the user input unit 107 may also include other input devices 1072 . Specifically, other input devices 1072 may include, but are not limited to, one or more of physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control buttons, switch buttons, etc.), trackballs, mice, joysticks, etc., which are not limited here. .
可选地,触控面板1071可覆盖显示面板1061,当触控面板1071检测到在其上或附近的触摸操作后,传送给处理器110以确定触摸事件的类型,随后处理器110根据触摸事件的类型在显示面板1061上提供相应的视觉输出。虽然在图1中,触控面板1071与显示面板1061是作为两个独立的部件来实现移动终端的输入和输出功能,但是在某些实施例中,可以将触控面板1071与显示面板1061集成而实现移动终端的输入和输出功能,具体此处不做限定。Optionally, the touch panel 1071 may cover the display panel 1061. When the touch panel 1071 detects a touch operation on or near it, it transmits to the processor 110 to determine the type of the touch event, and then the processor 110 determines the touch event according to the touch event. The corresponding visual output is provided on the display panel 1061 . Although in FIG. 1, the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 are used as two independent components to realize the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, in some embodiments, the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 can be integrated. The implementation of the input and output functions of the mobile terminal is not specifically limited here.
接口单元108用作至少一个外部装置与移动终端100连接可以通过的接口。例如,外部装置可以包括有线或无线头戴式耳机端口、外部电源(或电池充电器)端口、有线或无线数据端口、存储卡端口、用于连接具有识别模块的装置的端口、音频输入/输出(I/O)端口、视频I/O端口、耳机端口等等。接口单元108可以用于接收来自外部装置的输入(例如,数据信息、电力等等)并且将接收到的输入传输到移动终端100内的一个或多个元件或者可以用于在移动终端100和外部装置之间传输数据。The interface unit 108 serves as an interface through which at least one external device can be connected with the mobile terminal 100 . For example, an external device may include a wired or wireless headset port, an external power (or battery charger) port, a wired or wireless data port, a memory card port, a port for connecting a device with an identification module, audio input/output (I/O) ports, video I/O ports, headphone ports, and more. The interface unit 108 can be used to receive input from an external device (for example, data information, power, etc.) transfer data between devices.
存储器109可用于存储软件程序以及各种数据。存储器109可主要包括存储程序区和存储数据区,可选地,存储程序区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等;存储数据区可存储根据手机的使用所创建的数据(比如音频数据、电话本等)等。此外,存储器109可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性 存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件、或其他易失性固态存储器件。The memory 109 can be used to store software programs as well as various data. The memory 109 can mainly include a storage program area and a storage data area. Optionally, the storage program area can store an operating system, at least one function required application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) etc.; the storage data area can be Store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created according to the use of the mobile phone. In addition, the memory 109 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other volatile solid-state storage devices.
处理器110是移动终端的控制中心,利用各种接口和线路连接整个移动终端的各个部分,通过运行或执行存储在存储器109内的软件程序和/或模块,以及调用存储在存储器109内的数据,执行移动终端的各种功能和处理数据,从而对移动终端进行整体监控。处理器110可包括一个或多个处理单元;优选的,处理器110可集成应用处理器和调制解调处理器,可选地,应用处理器主要处理操作系统、用户界面和应用程序等,调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信。可以理解的是,上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器110中。The processor 110 is the control center of the mobile terminal, and uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the entire mobile terminal, by running or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 109, and calling data stored in the memory 109 , execute various functions of the mobile terminal and process data, so as to monitor the mobile terminal as a whole. The processor 110 may include one or more processing units; preferably, the processor 110 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor. Optionally, the application processor mainly processes operating systems, user interfaces, and application programs, etc. The demodulation processor mainly handles wireless communication. It can be understood that the foregoing modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 110 .
移动终端100还可以包括给各个部件供电的电源111(比如电池),优选的,电源111可以通过电源管理系统与处理器110逻辑相连,从而通过电源管理系统实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗管理等功能。The mobile terminal 100 can also include a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components. Preferably, the power supply 111 can be logically connected to the processor 110 through a power management system, so as to manage charging, discharging, and power consumption through the power management system. and other functions.
尽管图1未示出,移动终端100还可以包括蓝牙模块等,在此不再赘述。Although not shown in FIG. 1 , the mobile terminal 100 may also include a Bluetooth module, etc., which will not be repeated here.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,下面对本申请的移动终端所基于的通信网络系统进行描述。In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following describes the communication network system on which the mobile terminal of the present application is based.
请参阅图2,图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信网络系统架构图,该通信网络系统为通用移动通信技术的LTE系统,该LTE系统包括依次通讯连接的UE(User Equipment,用户设备)201,E-UTRAN(Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network,演进式UMTS陆地无线接入网)202,EPC(Evolved Packet Core,演进式分组核心网)203和运营商的IP业务204。Please refer to Fig. 2, Fig. 2 is a kind of communication network system architecture diagram that the embodiment of the present application provides, and this communication network system is the LTE system of general mobile communication technology, and this LTE system includes the UE (User Equipment, user equipment) that communication connects sequentially ) 201, E-UTRAN (Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network, Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network) 202, EPC (Evolved Packet Core, Evolved Packet Core Network) 203 and the operator's IP service 204.
可选地,UE201可以是上述终端100,此处不再赘述。Optionally, the UE 201 may be the above-mentioned terminal 100, which will not be repeated here.
E-UTRAN202包括eNodeB2021和其它eNodeB2022等。可选地,eNodeB2021可以通过回程(backhaul)(例如X2接口)与其它eNodeB2022连接,eNodeB2021连接到EPC203,eNodeB2021可以提供UE201到EPC203的接入。 E-UTRAN 202 includes eNodeB 2021 and other eNodeB 2022 and so on. Optionally, the eNodeB 2021 can be connected to other eNodeB 2022 through a backhaul (for example, X2 interface), the eNodeB 2021 is connected to the EPC 203 , and the eNodeB 2021 can provide access from the UE 201 to the EPC 203 .
EPC203可以包括MME(Mobility Management Entity,移动性管理实体)2031,HSS(Home Subscriber Server,归属用户服务器)2032,其它MME2033,SGW(Serving Gate Way,服务网关)2034,PGW(PDN Gate Way,分组数据网络网关)2035和PCRF(Policy and Charging Rules Function,政策和资费功能实体)2036等。可选地,MME2031是处理UE201和EPC203之间信令的控制节点,提供承载和连接管理。HSS2032用于提供一些寄存器来管理诸如归属位置寄存器(图中未示)之类的功能,并且保存有一些有关服务特征、数据速率等用户专用的信息。所有用户数据都可以通过SGW2034进行发送,PGW2035可以提供UE 201的IP地址分配以及其它功能,PCRF2036是业务数据流和IP承载资源的策略与计费控制策略决策点,它为策略与计费执行功能单元(图中未示)选择及提供可用的策略和计费控制决策。EPC203 may include MME (Mobility Management Entity, Mobility Management Entity) 2031, HSS (Home Subscriber Server, Home Subscriber Server) 2032, other MME2033, SGW (Serving Gate Way, Serving Gateway) 2034, PGW (PDN Gate Way, packet data Network Gateway) 2035 and PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function, Policy and Charging Functional Entity) 2036, etc. Optionally, MME2031 is a control node that processes signaling between UE201 and EPC203, and provides bearer and connection management. HSS2032 is used to provide some registers to manage functions such as home location register (not shown in the figure), and save some user-specific information about service features and data rates. All user data can be sent through SGW2034, PGW2035 can provide UE 201 IP address allocation and other functions, PCRF2036 is the policy and charging control policy decision point of service data flow and IP bearer resources, it is the policy and charging execution function A unit (not shown) selects and provides available policy and charging control decisions.
IP业务204可以包括因特网、内联网、IMS(IP Multimedia Subsystem,IP多媒体子系统)或其它IP业务等。The IP service 204 may include Internet, Intranet, IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem, IP Multimedia Subsystem) or other IP services.
虽然上述以LTE系统为例进行了介绍,但本领域技术人员应当知晓,本申请不仅仅适用于LTE系统,也可以适用于其他无线通信系统,例如GSM、CDMA2000、WCDMA、TD-SCDMA以及未来新的网络系统(如5G)等,此处不做限定。Although the LTE system is used as an example above, those skilled in the art should know that this application is not only applicable to the LTE system, but also applicable to other wireless communication systems, such as GSM, CDMA2000, WCDMA, TD-SCDMA and future new wireless communication systems. The network system (such as 5G), etc., is not limited here.
基于上述移动终端硬件结构以及通信网络系统,提出本申请各个实施例。Based on the above mobile terminal hardware structure and communication network system, various embodiments of the present application are proposed.
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be clearly and completely described below in conjunction with the drawings in the embodiments of the present application.
请参见图3所示的实施例,图3为本申请实施例提供的一种图标的显示方法的流程示意图,该方法可以应用于移动终端或者固定终端等智能终端,为了便于阐述,本申请实施例以执行主体为移动终端为例进行说明。可选地,本实施例示出的图标的显示方法包括:Please refer to the embodiment shown in Figure 3. Figure 3 is a schematic flowchart of an icon display method provided by the embodiment of this application. This method can be applied to smart terminals such as mobile terminals or fixed terminals. An example is described by taking the execution subject as a mobile terminal as an example. Optionally, the icon display method shown in this embodiment includes:
S10、确定目标图标区域的目标场景模式。S10. Determine the target scene mode of the target icon area.
移动终端可以包括至少一个图标区域,可选地,该至少一个图标区域中的各个图标区域可以指的是大文件夹或者应用卡片等。可以理解的是,移动终端中的图标区域包括至少一个图标子区域,且至少一个图标子区域中的任一图标子区域可以显示该图标区域中的任一图标。可选地,不同图标区域可以具有不同的区域标识,其中不同图标区域的区域标识可以是移动终端设置的,也可以是用户设置的。The mobile terminal may include at least one icon area. Optionally, each icon area in the at least one icon area may refer to a large folder or an application card. It can be understood that the icon area in the mobile terminal includes at least one icon sub-area, and any icon sub-area in the at least one icon sub-area can display any icon in the icon area. Optionally, different icon areas may have different area identifications, wherein the area identifications of different icon areas may be set by the mobile terminal or by the user.
可选地,图标区域包含的图标可以指的是如下一种或多种:用于指示应用的图标(即应用所对应的图标),用于指示应用功能的图标(可选地收款图标或者扫一扫图标等),用于指示移动终端的功能的图标(可选地手电筒图标或者设置图标等),用于指示内容的图标(可选地通知信息的图标或者会话内容的图标等)。Optionally, the icons contained in the icon area may refer to one or more of the following: an icon used to indicate an application (that is, an icon corresponding to the application), an icon used to indicate an application function (optionally a collection icon or scan icon, etc.), an icon used to indicate the function of the mobile terminal (optionally a flashlight icon or a setting icon, etc.), an icon used to indicate content (optionally an icon for notification information or an icon for conversation content, etc.).
为了便于阐述,后续均以图标区域指的是大文件夹,且图标区域中的图标指的是用于指示应用的图标为例进行说明。可以理解的是,图标区域区别于小文件夹的是:用户可以不展开图标区域,而对显示在该图标区域的图标子区域中的图标或者 该图标所对应的应用进行操作。可选地,用户可以在不展开图标区域的情况下,点击显示在该图标区域的各个图标子区域中的任一图标,移动终端可以响应用户的点击操作,启动用户的点击操作所指示的图标所对应的应用。For ease of explanation, the following descriptions will be made by taking the icon area as an example referring to a large folder, and the icon in the icon area as an example for indicating an application. It can be understood that the difference between the icon area and the small folder is that the user can operate the icon displayed in the icon sub-area of the icon area or the application corresponding to the icon without expanding the icon area. Optionally, the user can click any icon displayed in each icon sub-area of the icon area without expanding the icon area, and the mobile terminal can respond to the user's click operation and activate the icon indicated by the user's click operation. corresponding application.
可选地,移动终端可以包括锁定图标区域,用户仅能对该锁定图标区域中的图标执行启动操作,以启动该启动操作所指示的图标对应的程序,如启动该图标对应的应用等。但是,用户不能对该锁定图标区域中的图标执行其他操作,例如移出或者卸载等操作。Optionally, the mobile terminal may include a lock icon area, and the user can only perform a start operation on icons in the lock icon area to start a program corresponding to the icon indicated by the start operation, such as start an application corresponding to the icon. However, the user cannot perform other operations on the icons in the locked icon area, such as operations such as moving out or uninstalling.
可选地,移动终端可以将预设图标区域作为目标图标区域,该预设图标区域可以是移动终端设置的图标区域,也可以是用户按照意愿设置的图标区域。可选地,如果用户对移动终端中的任一图标区域进行了场景化操作,那么移动终端可以将上述任一图标区域作为目标图标区域,其中用户执行场景化操作的具体方式可参见后文描述。可选地,如果用户在移动终端的设置界面进行了区域设置操作,那么移动终端可以响应用户执行的区域设置操作,将区域设置操作所指示的图标区域作为目标图标区域。本申请对目标图标区域的具体确定方式不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may use a preset icon area as the target icon area, and the preset icon area may be an icon area set by the mobile terminal, or an icon area set by the user as desired. Optionally, if the user performs scene operation on any icon area in the mobile terminal, then the mobile terminal can use any of the above icon areas as the target icon area, and the specific way for the user to perform the scene operation can be found in the following description . Optionally, if the user performs an area setting operation on the setting interface of the mobile terminal, the mobile terminal may respond to the area setting operation performed by the user and use the icon area indicated by the area setting operation as the target icon area. The present application does not limit the specific manner of determining the target icon area.
上述目标场景模式可以为移动终端中的场景模式集中的任一场景模式,场景模式集可以包括属性类场景模式以及非属性类场景模式,示例性的,属性类场景模式包含但不限定于游戏场景模式、社交场景模式以及办公场景模式等;而非属性类场景模式包含但不限定于简约场景模式以及清新场景模式等,以清新场景模式为例,目标图标区域在清新场景模式下,目标图标区域中的至少一个图标可以以小清新风格的形式呈现,使得至少一个图标的显示风格为小清新风格。The above-mentioned target scene mode can be any scene mode in the scene mode set in the mobile terminal, and the scene mode set can include attribute-type scene modes and non-attribute-type scene modes. Exemplarily, attribute-type scene modes include but are not limited to game scenes mode, social scene mode and office scene mode, etc.; non-attribute scene modes include but are not limited to simple scene mode and fresh scene mode, etc., taking fresh scene mode as an example, the target icon area is in the fresh scene mode, the target icon area At least one icon in can be presented in a small and fresh style, so that the display style of at least one icon is a small and fresh style.
可以理解的是,在属性类场景模式下,可以存在场景属性信息,不同属性类场景模式对应不同场景属性信息,场景属性信息可以用于指示对应场景模式的属性,可选地,假设目标图标区域的场景模式为游戏场景模式,那么该场景模式对应的场景属性信息可以为“游戏”。It can be understood that, in the attribute-type scene mode, there may be scene attribute information, and different attribute-type scene modes correspond to different scene attribute information, and the scene attribute information can be used to indicate the attribute of the corresponding scene mode. Optionally, it is assumed that the target icon area If the scene mode is a game scene mode, then the scene attribute information corresponding to the scene mode may be "game".
在一种实施方式中,确定目标图标区域的目标场景模式的过程包括步骤s11和s12:In one embodiment, the process of determining the target scene mode of the target icon area includes steps s11 and s12:
s11、确定目标图标区域的区域属性信息。s11. Determine area attribute information of the target icon area.
可选地,移动终端可以确定目标图标区域中的各个图标所对应应用的应用属性信息,按照目标图标区域中的各个图标所对应应用的应用属性信息进行数量累加处理,得到各个应用属性信息对应的图标的数量,并将各个应用属性信息中数量满足预设数量条件的应用属性信息作为目标图标区域的区域属性信息。Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine the application attribute information of the application corresponding to each icon in the target icon area, perform quantitative accumulation processing according to the application attribute information of the application corresponding to each icon in the target icon area, and obtain the application attribute information corresponding to each application attribute information. The number of icons, and the application attribute information whose quantity satisfies the preset quantity condition in each application attribute information is used as the area attribute information of the target icon area.
可选地,所述数量满足预设数量条件的应用属性信息可以指的是数量大于预设数量阈值的应用属性信息,也可以指的是数量最大的应用属性信息,本申请对此不作限定。上述预设数量阈值可以是移动终端设置的,也可以是用户按照意愿设置的,本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, the number of application attribute information satisfying the preset quantity condition may refer to the application attribute information whose quantity is greater than the preset quantity threshold, or may refer to the application attribute information with the largest quantity, which is not limited in the present application. The aforementioned preset quantity threshold may be set by the mobile terminal, or may be set by the user as desired, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,假设目标图标区域包括图标A、B以及C,图标A和图标B所对应应用的应用属性信息为“游戏”,图标C所对应应用的应用属性信息为“社交”,那么移动终端对各个图标所对应应用的应用属性信息进行数量累加处理后,可以得到应用属性信息“游戏”对应的图标的数量为2,应用属性信息“社交”对应的图标的数量为1,假设数量满足预设数量条件的应用属性信息指的是数量最大的应用属性信息,那么移动终端可以将应用属性信息“游戏”作为目标图标区域的区域属性信息。Optionally, assuming that the target icon area includes icons A, B, and C, the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon A and icon B is "game", and the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon C is "social", then the mobile terminal After adding up the application attribute information of the application corresponding to each icon, it can be obtained that the number of icons corresponding to the application attribute information "game" is 2, and the number of icons corresponding to the application attribute information "social" is 1. Assume that the number meets the preset Assuming that the application attribute information of the quantity condition refers to the application attribute information with the largest quantity, then the mobile terminal may use the application attribute information "game" as the area attribute information of the target icon area.
可选地,假设应用属性信息“游戏”对应的图标的数量为2,应用属性信息“社交”对应的图标的数量为1,数量满足预设数量条件的应用属性信息指的是数量大于预设阈值的应用属性信息,若预设数量阈值为1,那么移动终端可以将应用属性信息“游戏”作为上述区域属性信息;若预设数量阈值为0,可以理解的是,应用属性信息“游戏”和应用属性信息“社交”对应的图标的数量均满足预设数量条件,那么移动终端可以将应用属性信息“游戏”和应用属性信息“社交”中的任一应用属性信息作为上述区域属性信息。Optionally, assuming that the number of icons corresponding to the application attribute information "game" is 2, and the number of icons corresponding to the application attribute information "social" is 1, the number of application attribute information that meets the preset quantity condition means that the number is greater than the preset For the application attribute information of the threshold, if the preset number threshold is 1, then the mobile terminal can use the application attribute information "game" as the above-mentioned area attribute information; if the preset number threshold is 0, it can be understood that the application attribute information "game" If the number of icons corresponding to the application attribute information "social" satisfies the preset quantity condition, then the mobile terminal can use any one of the application attribute information "game" and the application attribute information "social" as the above-mentioned area attribute information.
可选地,移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发区域标识设置指令,并响应区域标识设置指令,将区域标识设置指令所指示的区域标识作为目标图标区域的区域属性信息。可选地,如果用户对目标图标区域进行了区域表示设置操作,那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发区域标识设置指令,其中区域标识设置指令所指示的区域标识可以指的是区域标识设置操作所输入的区域标识。上述区域标识设置操作可以是用户对区域标识的标识输入操作,也可以是用户对区域标识的标识选择操作,本申请对区域标识设置操作的具体实施方式不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may trigger an area identification setting instruction in the target icon area, and respond to the area identification setting instruction, using the area identification indicated by the area identification setting instruction as the area attribute information of the target icon area. Optionally, if the user performs an area indication setting operation on the target icon area, the mobile terminal may trigger an area identification setting instruction on the target icon area, wherein the area identification indicated by the area identification setting instruction may refer to the area identification setting operation. The entered zone ID. The above-mentioned area identification setting operation may be the user's identification input operation on the area identification, or the user's identification selection operation on the area identification. This application does not limit the specific implementation of the area identification setting operation.
可选地,移动终端可以显示目标图标区域对应的区域标识设置区域,如果用户在区域标识设置区域进行了区域标识设置操作,那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发区域标识设置指令。可选地,如果用户对目标图标区域的区域标识所在的显示 区域进行了点击操作,那么移动终端可以响应用户执行的点击操作,显示目标图标区域对应的区域标识设置区域,若用户在区域标识设置区域执行了区域标识设置操作,那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发区域标识设置指令。可选地,如果用户长按目标图标区域,移动终端可以响应用户执行的长按操作,显示目标图标区域对应的区域编辑菜单,该区域编辑菜单包括区域标识设置选项,当用户对区域编辑菜单中的区域标识设置选项执行点击操作时,移动终端可以响应用户执行的点击操作,显示目标图标区域对应的区域标识设置区域,若用户在区域标识设置区域执行了区域标识设置操作,那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发区域标识设置指令。Optionally, the mobile terminal may display an area identification setting area corresponding to the target icon area, and if the user performs an area identification setting operation in the area identification setting area, the mobile terminal may trigger an area identification setting instruction in the target icon area. Optionally, if the user clicks on the display area where the area identifier of the target icon area is located, the mobile terminal may respond to the click operation performed by the user to display the area identification setting area corresponding to the target icon area. If the region has performed the region identifier setting operation, then the mobile terminal can trigger the region identifier setting instruction in the target icon region. Optionally, if the user presses the target icon area for a long time, the mobile terminal may respond to the long press operation performed by the user and display the area editing menu corresponding to the target icon area. The area editing menu includes area identification setting options. When performing a click operation on the area identification setting option, the mobile terminal can respond to the click operation performed by the user and display the area identification setting area corresponding to the target icon area. If the user performs the area identification setting operation in the area identification setting area, then the mobile terminal can The target icon area triggers the area flag setting command.
s12、将场景属性信息与区域属性信息匹配的场景模式作为目标图标区域的目标场景模式。s12. Use the scene mode in which the scene attribute information matches the area attribute information as the target scene mode of the target icon area.
可选地,在属性类场景模式下,可以存在场景属性信息,不同属性类场景模式对应不同场景属性信息,场景属性信息可以用于指示对应场景模式的属性,可选地,假设目标图标区域的场景模式为游戏场景模式,那么该场景模式对应的场景属性信息可以为“游戏”。Optionally, in the attribute-type scene mode, there may be scene attribute information, and different attribute-type scene modes correspond to different scene attribute information, and the scene attribute information can be used to indicate the attribute of the corresponding scene mode. Optionally, it is assumed that the target icon area If the scene mode is a game scene mode, then the scene attribute information corresponding to the scene mode may be "game".
可选地,假设移动终端中的属性类场景模式可以包括游戏场景模式、社交场景模式以及办公场景模式,且游戏场景模式的场景属性信息可以为“游戏”,社交场景模式的场景属性信息可以为“社交”,办公场景模式的场景属性信息可以为“办公”。那么当目标图标区域的区域属性信息为“游戏”时,可以确定与目标图标区域的区域属性信息匹配的场景属性信息为“游戏”,由于确定的场景属性信息对应的场景模式为游戏场景模式,那么移动终端可以将游戏场景模式作为目标图标区域的目标场景模式。Optionally, it is assumed that the attribute scene modes in the mobile terminal can include game scene modes, social scene modes and office scene modes, and the scene attribute information of the game scene mode can be "game", and the scene attribute information of the social scene mode can be The scene attribute information of the "social" and office scene modes may be "office". Then when the region attribute information of the target icon region is "game", it can be determined that the scene attribute information matching the region attribute information of the target icon region is "game", since the scene mode corresponding to the determined scene property information is a game scene mode, Then the mobile terminal can use the game scene mode as the target scene mode of the target icon area.
另一种实施方式中,确定目标图标区域的目标场景模式的过程包括步骤s21和s22:In another embodiment, the process of determining the target scene mode of the target icon area includes steps s21 and s22:
s21、于目标图标区域触发场景模式编辑指令,显示场景模式编辑指令所指示的场景模式编辑菜单。s21. Trigger a scene mode editing command in the target icon area, and display a scene mode editing menu indicated by the scene mode editing command.
可选地,如果用户对目标图标区域进行了场景模式编辑操作,那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发场景模式编辑指令,从而显示场景模式编辑指令所指示的场景模式编辑菜单,其中场景模式编辑指令所指示的场景模式编辑菜单可以指的是场景模式编辑操作所指示的场景模式编辑菜单。Optionally, if the user performs a scene mode editing operation on the target icon area, the mobile terminal may trigger the scene mode editing command in the target icon area, thereby displaying the scene mode editing menu indicated by the scene mode editing command, wherein the scene mode editing command The indicated scene mode editing menu may refer to a scene mode editing menu indicated by a scene mode editing operation.
上述场景模式编辑操作可以指的是用户对目标图标区域的长按操作,也可以指的是用户对目标图标区域的连续点击操作,本申请对场景模式编辑操作的具体实施方式不作限定。The above scene mode editing operation may refer to the user's long-press operation on the target icon area, or may refer to the user's continuous clicking operation on the target icon area. This application does not limit the specific implementation of the scene mode editing operation.
可选地,图4a为本申请实施例提供的一种图标的示意图,如图4a所示,以目标图标区域为图标区域411为例,当用户对目标图标区域执行场景模式编辑操作时,移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发场景模式编辑指令,从而显示场景模式编辑指令所指示的场景模式编辑菜单413。Optionally, FIG. 4a is a schematic diagram of an icon provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4a, taking the target icon area as the icon area 411 as an example, when the user performs scene mode editing operations on the target icon area, move The terminal can trigger a scene mode editing command in the target icon area, so as to display the scene mode editing menu 413 indicated by the scene mode editing command.
s22、于场景模式编辑菜单触发场景模式选择指令,将场景模式选择指令选中的场景模式作为目标图标区域的目标场景模式。s22. Trigger a scene mode selection command in the scene mode editing menu, and use the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection command as the target scene mode of the target icon area.
可选地,如果用户对场景模式编辑菜单进行了场景模式选择操作,那么移动终端可以于场景模式编辑菜单触发场景模式选择指令,从而将场景模式选择指令选中的场景模式作为目标图标区域的目标场景模式,其中将场景模式选择指令选中的场景模式可以指的是场景模式选择操作选中的场景模式。Optionally, if the user performs a scene mode selection operation on the scene mode edit menu, the mobile terminal can trigger a scene mode selection command in the scene mode edit menu, so that the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection command is used as the target scene of the target icon area mode, wherein the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection instruction may refer to the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection operation.
上述场景模式选择操作可以是用户对场景模式编辑菜单包含的任一场景模式的点击操作,可以理解的是,场景模式选择操作选中的场景模式指的是用户在场景模式编辑菜单中的点击操作所作用的场景模式;上述场景模式选择操作也可以是用户对场景模式编辑菜单的场景模式滑动操作,该场景模式滑动操作可以将场景模式编辑菜单中包含的任一场景模式滑动至场景模式确定区域,也就是说,场景模式确定区域中的场景模式即为场景模式选择操作所选中的场景模式,本申请对场景模式选择操作的具体实施方式不作限定。The above-mentioned scene mode selection operation may be the user's click operation on any scene mode contained in the scene mode editing menu. It can be understood that the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection operation refers to the user's click operation in the scene mode edit menu. The active scene mode; the above scene mode selection operation can also be the scene mode sliding operation of the user on the scene mode editing menu, and the scene mode sliding operation can slide any scene mode contained in the scene mode editing menu to the scene mode determination area, That is to say, the scene mode in the scene mode determination area is the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection operation, and the present application does not limit the specific implementation manner of the scene mode selection operation.
可选地,如图4a所示,以目标图标区域为图标区域414为例,场景模式编辑菜单413中包含简约场景模式、清新场景模式以及游戏场景模式,如果用户对场景模式编辑菜单413执行了场景模式选择操作,且场景模式选择操作选中的场景模式为游戏场景模式,那么移动终端可以于场景模式编辑菜单触发场景模式选择指令,并将场景模式选择指令选中的场景模式(即游戏场景模式)作为目标图标区域的目标场景模式。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 4a, taking the target icon area as the icon area 414 as an example, the scene mode editing menu 413 includes a simple scene mode, a refreshing scene mode and a game scene mode. Scene mode selection operation, and the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection operation is the game scene mode, then the mobile terminal can trigger the scene mode selection command in the scene mode editing menu, and the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection command (that is, the game scene mode) The target scene mode as the target icon area.
S20、获取目标图标区域中的至少一个图标。S20. Acquire at least one icon in the target icon area.
可选地,移动终端可以确定目标图标区域中的各个图标所对应应用的应用属性信息,并将目标图标区域中的应用属性信息与目标场景模式匹配的图标作为至少一个图标。上述应用属性信息可以指的是图标所对应应用的属性,可选地,目标图标 区域中的任一图标所对应应用的属性为“游戏”,那么该图标所对应应用的应用属性信息为“游戏”。Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine the application attribute information of the application corresponding to each icon in the target icon area, and use the icon whose application attribute information in the target icon area matches the target scene mode as at least one icon. The above application attribute information may refer to the attribute of the application corresponding to the icon. Optionally, if the attribute of the application corresponding to any icon in the target icon area is "game", then the application attribute information of the application corresponding to the icon is "game". ".
可选地,假设目标图标区域包括图标A、B以及C,图标A和图标B所对应应用的应用属性信息为“游戏”,图标C所对应应用的应用属性信息为“社交”,且目标场景模式为游戏场景模式,那么应用属性信息“游戏”与目标场景模式匹配,也就是说,那么目标图标区域中的应用属性信息与目标场景模式匹配的图标包括图标A和图标B,那么移动终端可以将图标A和图标B作为至少一个图标。Optionally, it is assumed that the target icon area includes icons A, B, and C, the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon A and icon B is "game", the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon C is "social", and the target scene mode is the game scene mode, then the application attribute information "game" matches the target scene mode, that is, the icons in the target icon area where the application attribute information matches the target scene mode include icon A and icon B, then the mobile terminal can Take icon A and icon B as at least one icon.
可选地,移动终端可以确定目标场景模式是否为属性类场景模式,若是,则将目标图标区域中的应用属性信息与目标场景模式匹配的图标作为至少一个图标;若否,则将目标图标区域中的所有图标作为至少一个图标。可选地,假设目标图标区域包括图标A、B以及C,图标A和图标B所对应应用的应用属性信息为“游戏”,图标C所对应应用的应用属性信息为“社交”,若目标场景模式为游戏场景模式,移动终端则可以将图标A和图标B作为至少一个图标;若目标场景模式为清新场景模式,移动终端则可以将图标A、B以及C作为至少一个图标。Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine whether the target scene mode is an attribute scene mode, and if so, use the icon whose application attribute information in the target icon area matches the target scene mode as at least one icon; All icons in as at least one icon. Optionally, assume that the target icon area includes icons A, B, and C, the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon A and icon B is "game", and the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon C is "social", if the target scene If the mode is a game scene mode, the mobile terminal can use icons A and B as at least one icon; if the target scene mode is a refreshing scene mode, the mobile terminal can use icons A, B and C as at least one icon.
S30、按照目标场景模式生成或确定场景化界面,并在场景化界面中显示至少一个图标。S30. Generate or determine a scene-based interface according to the target scene mode, and display at least one icon in the scene-based interface.
上述场景化界面可以指的是按照目标场景模式生成的显示界面,其中该显示界面可以独立于目标图标区域,示例性的,显示界面可以显示在目标图标区域所在的区域显示位置;或者,该显示界面可以独立于图标显示区域,示例性的,显示界面可以显示在图标显示界面所在的界面显示位置,本申请对此不作限定。The above scene interface may refer to a display interface generated according to the target scene mode, wherein the display interface may be independent of the target icon area, for example, the display interface may be displayed at the display position of the area where the target icon area is located; or, the display The interface may be independent of the icon display area. Exemplarily, the display interface may be displayed at the interface display position where the icon display interface is located, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,移动终端在按照目标场景模式生成或确定场景化界面时,可以确定场景化界面的显示背景,该显示背景可以是目标场景模式所指示的显示背景;也可以确定目标场景模式所指示的布局格式,该布局格式可以指的是场景化界面中的各个预设图标显示位置的分布,本申请对按照目标场景模式生成或确定场景化界面的具体内容不作限定。可以理解的是,当场景化界面中包含至少一个预设图标显示位置时,移动终端可以将至少一个图标显示在至少一个预设图标显示位置中的各个预设图标显示位置。可选地,上述预设图标显示位置可以是移动终端设置的,也可以是用户按照意愿设置的,本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, when the mobile terminal generates or determines the scene-based interface according to the target scene mode, it can determine the display background of the scene-based interface. The display background can be the display background indicated by the target scene mode; it can also determine the display background indicated by the target scene mode. The layout format may refer to the distribution of display positions of preset icons in the scene-based interface. This application does not limit the specific content of generating or determining the scene-based interface according to the target scene mode. It can be understood that, when the scene interface includes at least one preset icon display position, the mobile terminal may display at least one icon at each preset icon display position in the at least one preset icon display position. Optionally, the above-mentioned preset icon display position may be set by the mobile terminal, or set by the user according to wishes, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发场景化指令,响应场景化指令,从而触发所述按照目标场景模式生成或确定场景化界面,并在场景化界面中显示至少一个图标。可选地,如果用户对目标图标区域进行了场景化操作,那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发场景化指令。Optionally, the mobile terminal may trigger a scene-based instruction in the target icon area, and respond to the scene-based instruction, thereby triggering the generation or determination of the scene-based interface according to the target scene mode, and displaying at least one icon in the scene-based interface. Optionally, if the user performs a scenario operation on the target icon area, the mobile terminal may trigger a scenario instruction in the target icon area.
在用户对目标图标区域执行场景化操作时,用户可以长按目标图标区域,移动终端响应用户执行的长按操作,显示目标图标区域对应的区域编辑菜单,该区域编辑菜单中包含生成或确定场景化界面的选项,那么用户可以通过对区域编辑菜单中的生成或确定场景化界面选项的区域菜单选择操作,以实现对目标图标区域的场景化操作;用户还可以对目标图标区域执行区域展开操作,移动终端响应用户执行的区域展开操作,显示目标图标区域中的所有图标,得到目标图标区域对应的图标显示界面,图标显示界面中包括第一预设子区域,那么用户可以通过对第一预设子区域的点击操作,以实现对目标图标区域的场景化操作。可选地,区域展开操作可以是用户对目标图标区域的空白区域的点击操作,也可以是用户对目标图标区域的第二预设子区域的点击操作,本申请对区域展开操作的具体实施方式不作限定。本申请对场景化操作的具体实施方式不作限定。When the user performs a scene operation on the target icon area, the user can press and hold the target icon area, and the mobile terminal responds to the long press operation performed by the user, and displays the area editing menu corresponding to the target icon area. The area editing menu includes generating or determining the scene If you want to select the option of the scene-based interface in the region edit menu, the user can realize the scene-based operation of the target icon area by selecting the area menu in the area edit menu or determining the scene-based interface option; the user can also perform the area expansion operation on the target icon area , the mobile terminal displays all the icons in the target icon area in response to the area expansion operation performed by the user, and obtains the icon display interface corresponding to the target icon area, and the icon display interface includes the first preset sub-area, then the user can select Set the click operation of the sub-area to realize the scene-based operation of the target icon area. Optionally, the area expansion operation may be the user's click operation on the blank area of the target icon area, or the user's click operation on the second preset sub-area of the target icon area. The specific implementation method of the area expansion operation in this application Not limited. The present application does not limit the specific implementation manner of the scene-based operation.
可选地,图4b为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图,如图4b所示,显示界面415中包含两个图标区域,分别为图标区域416和图标区域417,不同图标区域的区域标识可以不同,图标区域416的区域标识为“工具”,图标区域417的区域标识为“游戏”,以目标图标区域为图标区域417为例,目标图标区域包括图标E、K、M、H以及O。假设目标场景模式为游戏场景模式,至少一个图标包括图标E、M以及H,如果用户长按目标图标区域,移动终端可以响应用户执行的长按操作,显示目标图标区域对应的区域编辑菜单418,若用户对区域编辑菜单418中的生成或确定场景化界面选项执行了区域菜单选择操作,也就是说,用户通过上述区域菜单选择操作对目标图标区域进行了场景化操作,那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发场景化指令,响应场景化指令,从而按照目标场景模式生成或确定场景化界面(即显示界面419),并在场景化界面中显示至少一个图标。Optionally, FIG. 4b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4b, the display interface 415 includes two icon areas, which are icon area 416 and icon area 417, respectively. The area identification can be different, the area identification of the icon area 416 is "tool", the area identification of the icon area 417 is "game", taking the target icon area as the icon area 417 as an example, the target icon area includes icons E, K, M, H and O. Assuming that the target scene mode is a game scene mode, at least one icon includes icons E, M, and H. If the user presses the target icon area for a long time, the mobile terminal can respond to the long press operation performed by the user and display the area editing menu 418 corresponding to the target icon area. If the user performs an area menu selection operation on the option of generating or determining a scene-based interface in the area edit menu 418, that is, the user performs a scene-based operation on the target icon area through the above-mentioned area menu selection operation, then the mobile terminal can operate on the target icon area. The icon area triggers the scenario instruction and responds to the scenario instruction, thereby generating or determining the scenario interface (ie, the display interface 419 ) according to the target scenario mode, and displaying at least one icon in the scenario interface.
可选地,移动终端可以按照目标场景模式对至少一个图标进行形态或参数变化处理,得到至少一个图标对应的形态或参数更新后的图标,并在场景化界面中显示所述至少一个图标对应的形态或参数更新后的图标。可选地,图4c为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图,如图4c所示,以目标图标区域为图标区域422为例,目标图标区域包括图标E、K、M、H以及O,假设目标场景模式为游戏场景模式,至少一个图标包括图标E、K以及H,那么移动终端可以按照目标场景模式对至 少一个图标进行形态或参数变化处理,假设图标E对应的形态或参数更新后的图标为图标424,图标M对应的形态或参数更新后的图标为图标425,图标H对应的形态或参数更新后的图标为图标426,那么移动终端可以将图标424、图标425以及图标426显示在场景化界面中。可选地,移动终端对图标进行形态或参数变化处理可以指的是:对图标的大小,形状,颜色,形状角度及相关参数等进行调整处理,本申请对形态或参数变化处理的具体处理方式不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may perform form or parameter change processing on at least one icon according to the target scene mode, obtain an icon corresponding to the form or parameter update of the at least one icon, and display the icon corresponding to the at least one icon in the scene interface. Icon after the pattern or parameter has been updated. Optionally, FIG. 4c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4c, taking the icon area 422 as the target icon area as an example, the target icon area includes icons E, K, M, H and O, assuming that the target scene mode is a game scene mode, and at least one icon includes icons E, K, and H, then the mobile terminal can perform form or parameter change processing on at least one icon according to the target scene mode, assuming that the form or parameter corresponding to icon E is updated The icon after icon 424 is icon 424, the icon corresponding to the form of icon M or the icon after parameter update is icon 425, and the icon after icon H is corresponding to form or parameter update is icon 426, then the mobile terminal can use icon 424, icon 425 and icon 426 Displayed in the scene interface. Optionally, the mobile terminal changes the shape or parameter of the icon may refer to: adjust the size, shape, color, shape angle and related parameters of the icon, the specific processing method of the application for the shape or parameter change Not limited.
可选地,移动终端可以确定目标图标区域对应的目标显示区域,按照目标场景模式在目标显示区域中生成或确定场景化界面,并在场景化界面中显示至少一个图标。可选地,移动终端可以将图标显示界面所在的界面显示位置作为目标显示区域,也可以将目标图标区域所在的区域显示位置作为目标显示区域,本申请对目标显示区域的具体确定方式不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine a target display area corresponding to the target icon area, generate or determine a scene interface in the target display area according to the target scene mode, and display at least one icon in the scene interface. Optionally, the mobile terminal may use the interface display position where the icon display interface is located as the target display area, or may use the area display position where the target icon area is located as the target display area. The specific method for determining the target display area is not limited in this application.
可选地,图4d为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图,如图4d所示,显示界面427中包括图标区域428,以目标图标区域为图标区域428为例,如果用户对目标图标区域执行了区域展开操作,移动终端可以响应用户执行的区域展开操作,显示目标图标区域中的所有图标(即图标E、K、M、H以及O),得到目标图标区域对应的图标显示界面(即显示界面429)。以目标显示区域为图标显示界面所在的界面显示位置为例,并假设目标场景模式为游戏场景模式,也就是说,移动终端可以在目标显示区域中按照目标场景模式生成或确定场景化界面(即显示界面432),假设至少一个图标包括图标E、M以及H,那么移动终端可以将图标E、M以及H显示在场景化界面中。Optionally, FIG. 4d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4d, the display interface 427 includes an icon area 428. Taking the target icon area as the icon area 428 as an example, if the user selects the target The icon area has performed the area expansion operation, and the mobile terminal can respond to the area expansion operation performed by the user to display all the icons in the target icon area (ie icons E, K, M, H, and O), and obtain the icon display interface corresponding to the target icon area (ie display interface 429). Taking the target display area as an example of the interface display position where the icon display interface is located, and assuming that the target scene mode is a game scene mode, that is to say, the mobile terminal can generate or determine a scene interface in the target display area according to the target scene mode (ie display interface 432), assuming that at least one icon includes icons E, M, and H, then the mobile terminal may display the icons E, M, and H on the scene interface.
可选地,若存在目标场景模式,目标图标区域对应的图标显示界面可以包括第一预设区域;否则,目标图标区域对应的图标显示界面可以不包括第一预设区域。可选地,如图4d所示,假设目标图标区域存在目标场景模式,那么图标显示界面(即显示界面429)可以包括第一预设子区域(即显示区域430),若用户对第一预设子区域进行了点击操作,移动终端可以响应用户执行的点击操作,按照目标场景模式生成或确定场景化界面(即显示界面432)。Optionally, if there is a target scene mode, the icon display interface corresponding to the target icon area may include the first preset area; otherwise, the icon display interface corresponding to the target icon area may not include the first preset area. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 4d, assuming that there is a target scene mode in the target icon area, the icon display interface (that is, the display interface 429) may include a first preset sub-area (that is, the display area 430). If the sub-area is clicked, the mobile terminal can generate or determine a scene interface (ie, display interface 432 ) according to the target scene mode in response to the click operation performed by the user.
可选地,目标显示区域为目标图标区域,移动终端按照目标场景模式在目标显示区域中生成或确定场景化界面,包括:于目标图标区域触发显示切换指令;响应显示切换指令,按照目标场景模式在目标图标区域中生成或确定场景化界面。Optionally, the target display area is the target icon area, and the mobile terminal generates or determines the scene interface in the target display area according to the target scene mode, including: triggering a display switching instruction in the target icon area; responding to the display switching instruction, according to the target scene mode Generate or determine the scene interface in the target icon area.
可选地,如果用户对目标图标区域进行了显示切换操作,那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发显示切换指令。可选地,显示切换操作可以指的是用户对目标图标区域的滑动操作,也可以指的是用户对目标图标区域的连续点击操作,本申请对显示切换操作的具体实施方式不作限定。Optionally, if the user performs a display switching operation on the target icon area, the mobile terminal may trigger a display switching instruction on the target icon area. Optionally, the display switching operation may refer to the user's sliding operation on the target icon area, or may refer to the user's continuous clicking operation on the target icon area. This application does not limit the specific implementation of the display switching operation.
可选地,图4e为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图,如图4e所示,显示界面433中包括图标区域434,以目标图标区域为图标区域434为例,并假设目标场景模式为游戏场景模式,若用户对目标图标区域执行了显示切换操作,那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发显示切换指令,并响应显示切换指令,按照目标场景模式在目标显示区域(即显示区域436)中生成或确定场景化界面。Optionally, FIG. 4e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4e , the display interface 433 includes an icon area 434, taking the target icon area as the icon area 434 as an example, and assuming the target scene The mode is a game scene mode. If the user performs a display switching operation on the target icon area, the mobile terminal can trigger a display switching command in the target icon area, and in response to the display switching command, according to the target scene mode, the target display area (i.e., the display area 436 ) to generate or determine the scene interface.
可选地,移动终端按照目标场景模式生成或确定场景化界面,并在场景化界面中显示至少一个图标之后,可以于场景化界面触发隐藏指令,并响应隐藏指令,取消对目标图标区域对应的场景化界面的显示。可选地,在移动终端按照目标场景模式生成或确定场景化界面,并在场景化界面中显示至少一个图标之后,如果用户对场景化界面进行了隐藏操作,那么移动终端可以于场景化界面触发隐藏指令。上述隐藏操作可以指的是用户对场景化界面的滑动操作,也可以指的是用户对场景化界面的连续点击操作,还可以指的是用户在通知栏的设置操作等,本申请隐藏操作的具体实施方式不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal generates or determines the scene-based interface according to the target scene mode, and after displaying at least one icon in the scene-based interface, it can trigger a hidden command on the scene-based interface, and respond to the hidden command to cancel the target icon area. The display of the scene interface. Optionally, after the mobile terminal generates or determines the scene-based interface according to the target scene mode, and displays at least one icon in the scene-based interface, if the user performs a hidden operation on the scene-based interface, then the mobile terminal can trigger Hidden instructions. The above hidden operation may refer to the user's sliding operation on the scene interface, or the user's continuous clicking operation on the scene interface, or the user's setting operation on the notification bar, etc. The hidden operation of this application The specific implementation is not limited.
可选地,如图4e所示,以目标图标区域为图标区域434为例,当移动终端在目标显示区域(即显示区域436)中生成目标图标区域对应的场景化界面后,如果用户对场景化界面执行了隐藏操作,那么移动终端可以于场景化界面触发隐藏指令,并响应隐藏指令,取消对目标图标区域对应的场景化界面的显示,并将目标图标区域(即图标区域438)显示在目标显示区域(即图标区域438所在的区域显示位置)中。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 4e, taking the target icon area as the icon area 434 as an example, after the mobile terminal generates a scene-based interface corresponding to the target icon area in the target display area (that is, the display area 436), if the user selects the scene If the hidden operation is performed on the customized interface, then the mobile terminal can trigger a hidden command on the scene-based interface, and respond to the hidden command, cancel the display of the corresponding scene-based interface to the target icon area, and display the target icon area (ie, the icon area 438) on the In the target display area (that is, the area display position where the icon area 438 is located).
通过本申请实施例,移动终端可以将目标图标区域中的至少一个图标显示在场景化界面中,如果目标场景模式不同,那么可以将目标图标区域中的至少一个图标显示在不同的场景化界面中,从而对目标图标区域中的图标进行多样性或者趣味性地显示;并可以确定目标显示区域,如果目标显示区域不同,那么可以按照目标场景模式在不同的目标显示区域中生成或确定场景化界面,便于用户对目标图标区域对应的场景化界面的快速查看;还可以取消对场景化界面的显示,便于用户按照意愿对场景化界面进行管理。并且,移动终端可以确定目标图标区域的区域属性信息,并将场景属性信息与区域属性信息匹配的场景模式作为目标场景模式,当区域属性信息不同时,移动终端可以将不同的场景模式作为目标场景模式,从而对目标图标区域中的图标进行多样性或者趣味性地显示。另外,移动终端可以将用户设置的场景模式作为目标场景模式,以实现按照 用户设置的场景模式生成或确定场景化界面的目的,根据用户设置的不同场景模式,移动终端可以对目标图标区域中的图标进行多样性或者趣味性地显示。Through the embodiment of the present application, the mobile terminal can display at least one icon in the target icon area in the scene interface, and if the target scene modes are different, then at least one icon in the target icon area can be displayed in different scene interfaces , so that the icons in the target icon area are displayed in a variety or interest; and the target display area can be determined. If the target display areas are different, then the scene interface can be generated or determined in different target display areas according to the target scene mode , which is convenient for the user to quickly view the scene-based interface corresponding to the target icon area; it is also possible to cancel the display of the scene-based interface, so that the user can manage the scene-based interface according to his wishes. Moreover, the mobile terminal can determine the area attribute information of the target icon area, and use the scene mode in which the scene attribute information matches the area attribute information as the target scene mode. When the area attribute information is different, the mobile terminal can use different scene modes as the target scene mode. mode, so as to display the icons in the target icon area in a variety or interesting way. In addition, the mobile terminal can use the scene mode set by the user as the target scene mode to achieve the purpose of generating or determining the scene interface according to the scene mode set by the user. Icons are displayed in a variety or interesting way.
请参见图5所示的实施例,图5为本申请实施例提供的一种图标的处理方法的流程示意图,该方法可以应用于智能终端,故本申请实施例的执行主体可以是智能终端。可选地,本实施例示出的图标的处理方法包括:Please refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 . FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of an icon processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application. This method can be applied to a smart terminal, so the execution subject of the embodiment of the present application may be a smart terminal. Optionally, the icon processing method shown in this embodiment includes:
S501、确定目标图标区域,以及目标显示模式,目标显示模式为目标图标区域所处区域界面的界面显示模式或智能终端的目标主题模式。S501. Determine the target icon area and the target display mode, where the target display mode is the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located or the target theme mode of the smart terminal.
智能终端可以包括至少一个图标区域,可选地,该至少一个图标区域中的各个图标区域可以指的是大文件夹或者应用卡片等。可以理解的是,智能终端中的图标区域包括至少一个图标子区域,且至少一个图标子区域中的任一图标子区域可以显示该图标区域中的任一图标。可选地,不同图标区域可以具有不同的区域标识,其中不同图标区域的区域标识可以是智能终端设置的,也可以是用户设置的。The smart terminal may include at least one icon area, and optionally, each icon area in the at least one icon area may refer to a large folder or an application card. It can be understood that the icon area in the smart terminal includes at least one icon sub-area, and any icon sub-area in the at least one icon sub-area can display any icon in the icon area. Optionally, different icon areas may have different area identifications, wherein the area identifications of different icon areas may be set by the smart terminal or by the user.
可选地,图标区域包含的图标可以指的是如下一种或多种:用于指示应用的图标(即应用所对应的图标),用于指示应用功能的图标(可选地收款图标或者扫一扫图标等),用于指示智能终端的功能的图标(可选地手电筒图标或者设置图标等),用于指示内容的图标(可选地通知信息的图标或者会话内容的图标等)。Optionally, the icons contained in the icon area may refer to one or more of the following: an icon used to indicate an application (that is, an icon corresponding to the application), an icon used to indicate an application function (optionally a collection icon or scan icon, etc.), an icon used to indicate the function of the smart terminal (optionally a flashlight icon or a setting icon, etc.), an icon used to indicate content (optionally an icon for notification information or an icon for conversation content, etc.).
为了便于阐述,后续均以图标区域指的是大文件夹,且图标区域中的图标指的是用于指示应用的图标为例进行说明。可以理解的是,图标区域区别于小文件夹的是:用户可以不展开图标区域,而对显示在该图标区域的图标子区域中的图标或者该图标所对应的应用进行操作。可选地,用户可以在不展开图标区域的情况下,点击显示在该图标区域的各个图标子区域中的任一图标,智能终端可以响应用户的点击操作,启动用户的点击操作所指示的图标所对应的应用。For ease of explanation, the following descriptions will be made by taking the icon area as an example referring to a large folder, and the icon in the icon area as an example for indicating an application. It can be understood that the difference between the icon area and the small folder is that the user can operate the icon displayed in the icon sub-area of the icon area or the application corresponding to the icon without expanding the icon area. Optionally, the user can click any icon displayed in each icon sub-area of the icon area without expanding the icon area, and the smart terminal can respond to the user's click operation and start the icon indicated by the user's click operation corresponding application.
可选地,智能终端可以包括锁定图标区域,用户仅能对该锁定图标区域中的图标执行启动操作,以启动该启动操作所指示的图标对应的程序,如启动该图标对应的应用等。但是,用户不能对该锁定图标区域中的图标执行其他操作,例如移出或者卸载等操作。Optionally, the smart terminal may include a lock icon area, and the user can only perform a start operation on icons in the lock icon area to start a program corresponding to the icon indicated by the start operation, such as start an application corresponding to the icon. However, the user cannot perform other operations on the icons in the locked icon area, such as operations such as moving out or uninstalling.
可选地,智能终端可以将预设图标区域作为目标图标区域,该预设图标区域可以是智能终端设置的图标区域,也可以是用户按照意愿设置的图标区域。可选地,如果用户对显示屏幕中的任一图标区域或该任一图标区域中的任一图标进行了任一操作,那么智能终端可以将上述任一图标区域作为目标图标区域。可选地,智能终端可以将锁屏界面中的图标区域作为目标图标区域,或者智能终端可以将某个分屏显示区域中的图标区域作为目标图标区域,上述某个分屏显示区域可以为至少两个分屏显示区域中的任一分屏显示区域或者特定的一个或者多个分屏显示区域。本申请对目标图标区域的确定方式不作限定。Optionally, the smart terminal may use a preset icon area as the target icon area, and the preset icon area may be an icon area set by the smart terminal, or an icon area set by the user as desired. Optionally, if the user performs any operation on any icon area in the display screen or any icon in the any icon area, the smart terminal may use the above-mentioned any icon area as the target icon area. Optionally, the smart terminal can use the icon area in the lock screen interface as the target icon area, or the smart terminal can use the icon area in a certain split-screen display area as the target icon area, and the above-mentioned certain split-screen display area can be at least Any split-screen display area of the two split-screen display areas or specific one or more split-screen display areas. The present application does not limit the manner of determining the target icon area.
上述目标显示模式可以指的是目标图标区域所处的区域界面的界面显示模式,或者智能终端的目标主题模式。界面显示模式可以为分屏显示模式、锁屏显示模式、负一屏显示模式或者自动聚类模式等,本申请对此不作限定。可选地,若用于显示目标图标区域的显示屏幕包括至少两个分屏显示区域,那么智能终端可以将分屏显示模式作为界面显示模式;若目标图标区域为处于锁屏界面的图标区域,也就是说,目标图标区域所处的区域界面为锁屏界面,那么智能终端可以将锁屏显示模式作为界面显示模式;若目标图标区域处于负一屏界面,也就是说,目标图标区域所处的区域界面为负一屏界面,那么智能终端可以将负一屏模式作为界面显示模式,可选地,负一屏界面可以指的是从主界面向右滑动界面,直至无法向右滑动界面时的显示界面,负一屏界面可以包含待办事项列表、出行方案以及天气预报等应用卡片,其中应用卡片可显示至少一个应用的关键信息(例如运动步数、待办事项名称或者智能终端所处区域的实时温度等),且以卡片的形态呈现;若目标图标区域所处的区域界面具有对显示屏幕中的图标的自动聚类功能,该自动聚类功能可以指的是将显示屏幕中的各个图标移动至匹配的图标区域中,那么智能终端可以将自动聚类模式作为界面显示模式。The above target display mode may refer to the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located, or the target theme mode of the smart terminal. The interface display mode may be a split-screen display mode, a lock-screen display mode, a minus-one-screen display mode, or an automatic clustering mode, which is not limited in this application. Optionally, if the display screen used to display the target icon area includes at least two split-screen display areas, the smart terminal may use the split-screen display mode as the interface display mode; if the target icon area is an icon area on the lock screen interface, That is to say, if the area interface where the target icon area is located is the lock screen interface, then the smart terminal can use the lock screen display mode as the interface display mode; If the regional interface of the region is a negative one-screen interface, then the smart terminal can use the negative one-screen mode as the interface display mode. Optionally, the negative one-screen interface can refer to sliding the interface from the main interface to the right until the interface cannot be slid to the right The negative one-screen interface can contain application cards such as to-do lists, travel plans, and weather forecasts, among which the application cards can display key information of at least one application (such as the number of exercise steps, the name of the to-do items, or the location of the smart terminal. The real-time temperature of the area, etc.), and present it in the form of a card; if the area interface where the target icon area is located has an automatic clustering function for the icons in the display screen, the automatic clustering function can refer to the display screen. Each icon is moved to the matching icon area, then the smart terminal can use the automatic clustering mode as the interface display mode.
可选地,智能终端的目标主题模式可以是会议模式、飞行模式、骑行模式或者户外模式等,本申请对此不作限定,其中智能终端按照目标主题模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理的具体内容可参见后文描述。Optionally, the target theme mode of the smart terminal may be meeting mode, flight mode, riding mode, or outdoor mode, etc., which is not limited in the present application, wherein the smart terminal processes the icons in the target icon area according to the target theme mode For details, please refer to the following description.
可选地,智能终端可以根据目标显示模式确定目标图标区域的尺寸,并按照目标图标区域的尺寸对目标图标区域进行显示。可以理解的是,如果目标显示模式不同,那么目标图标区域的尺寸可以不同。可选地,上述尺寸可以描述目标图标区域包含的图标子区域的数量,以及目标图标区域包含的图标子区域的分布方式。可选地,假设智能终端确定的目标图标区域的尺寸为3*2,也就是说,目标图标区域可以包含6个图标子区域,且包含的图标子区域分布为3行,每行包含2个图标子区域,每个图标子区域的尺寸是预先设置的,且所有图标子区域的尺寸均相同。可选地,假设目标显示模式可以指的是目标图 标区域所处的区域界面的界面显示模,且锁屏显示模式下目标图标区域的尺寸为3*3、负一屏显示模式下目标图标区域的尺寸为1*4,那么当目标显示模式为锁屏显示模式时,智能终端可以根据目标显示模式确定目标图标区域的尺寸为3*3,并按照3*3的尺寸对目标图标区域进行显示。Optionally, the smart terminal may determine the size of the target icon area according to the target display mode, and display the target icon area according to the size of the target icon area. It can be understood that if the target display modes are different, the size of the target icon area may be different. Optionally, the above size may describe the number of icon sub-areas included in the target icon area, and the distribution manner of the icon sub-areas included in the target icon area. Optionally, assume that the size of the target icon area determined by the smart terminal is 3*2, that is to say, the target icon area may contain 6 icon sub-areas, and the contained icon sub-areas are distributed in 3 rows, and each row contains 2 icon sub-areas. Icon sub-areas, the size of each icon sub-area is preset, and the size of all icon sub-areas is the same. Optionally, it is assumed that the target display mode can refer to the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located, and the size of the target icon area in the lock screen display mode is 3*3, and the target icon area in negative one-screen display mode The size of the target icon is 1*4, then when the target display mode is the lock screen display mode, the smart terminal can determine the size of the target icon area as 3*3 according to the target display mode, and display the target icon area according to the size of 3*3 .
可选地,智能终端可以根据目标图标区域中的图标的数量,对目标图标区域的尺寸进行调整,得到调整后的尺寸,并按照调整后的尺寸对目标图标区域进行显示。可选地,智能终端可以确定目标图标区域的尺寸所指示的图标子区域的数量与目标图标区域中的图标的数量比值,若该比值大于预设阈值,那么智能终端可以对目标图标区域的尺寸进行调整。可选地,假设上述预设阈值为1,目标图标区域的尺寸为3*2,且目标图标区域中的图标的数量为2,即目标图标区域所指示的图标子区域的数量与目标图标区域中的图标的数量的比值大于预设阈值,那么智能终端可以将目标图标区域的尺寸调整为1*2或者2*2等,可以理解的是,调整后的尺寸所指示的图标子区域与目标图标区域中的图标的数量的比值小于或等于预设阈值。Optionally, the smart terminal may adjust the size of the target icon area according to the number of icons in the target icon area, obtain the adjusted size, and display the target icon area according to the adjusted size. Optionally, the smart terminal may determine the ratio of the number of icon sub-regions indicated by the size of the target icon area to the number of icons in the target icon area. If the ratio is greater than a preset threshold, the smart terminal may determine the size of the target icon area Make adjustments. Optionally, assuming that the above preset threshold is 1, the size of the target icon area is 3*2, and the number of icons in the target icon area is 2, that is, the number of icon sub-areas indicated by the target icon area is equal to the number of icon sub-areas indicated by the target icon area The ratio of the number of icons in is greater than the preset threshold, then the smart terminal can adjust the size of the target icon area to 1*2 or 2*2, etc. It can be understood that the icon sub-area indicated by the adjusted size is consistent with the target The ratio of the number of icons in the icon area is less than or equal to a preset threshold.
可选地,上述预设阈值可以是智能终端设置的,也可以是用户按照意愿设置的,本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, the above-mentioned preset threshold may be set by the smart terminal, or may be set by the user according to wishes, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,智能终端可确定目标图标区域所处的区域界面,以及区域界面的界面显示模式;并将界面显示模式作为目标显示模式。Optionally, the smart terminal may determine the area interface where the target icon area is located, and the interface display mode of the area interface; and use the interface display mode as the target display mode.
上述区域界面可以是锁屏界面、主界面、负一屏界面、又一屏界面或者目标图标区域所在的分屏显示区域对应的显示界面等,本申请对此不作限定。可选地,负一屏界面可以指的是从主界面向右滑动界面,直至无法向右滑动界面时的显示界面,且负一屏界面可以包含待办事项列表、出行方案以及天气预报等应用卡片;又一屏界面可以指的是具有自动聚类功能的显示界面,智能终端可以将显示屏幕中的所有图标进行聚类,并将同一类型的图标移动至同一图标区域中,从而将显示屏幕中的各个图标移动至对应的图标区域中。The above-mentioned area interface may be a lock screen interface, a main interface, a negative one-screen interface, another screen interface, or a display interface corresponding to the split-screen display area where the target icon area is located, which is not limited in this application. Optionally, the negative one-screen interface can refer to the display interface when sliding the interface to the right from the main interface until the interface cannot be slid to the right, and the negative one-screen interface can include applications such as to-do lists, travel plans, and weather forecasts Card; another screen interface can refer to a display interface with automatic clustering function, the smart terminal can cluster all the icons on the display screen, and move the icons of the same type to the same icon area, so that the display screen Each icon in moves to the corresponding icon area.
在确定目标图标区域所处的区域界面之后,智能终端可以确定目标图标区域所处的区域界面的界面显示模式,该界面显示模式可以为分屏显示模式、锁屏显示模式、负一屏显示模式或者自动聚类模式等,本申请对此不作限定。可选地,若用于显示目标图标区域的显示屏幕包括至少两个分屏显示区域,那么智能终端可以将分屏显示模式作为界面显示模式;若目标图标区域为处于锁屏界面的图标区域,也就是说,目标图标区域所处的区域界面为锁屏界面,那么智能终端可以将锁屏显示模式作为界面显示模式;若目标图标区域处于负一屏界面,也就是说,目标图标区域所处的区域界面为负一屏界面,那么智能终端可以将负一屏模式作为界面显示模式;若目标图标区域所处的区域界面具有对显示屏幕中的图标的自动聚类功能,该自动聚类功能可以指的是将显示屏幕中的各个图标移动至匹配的图标区域中,那么智能终端可以将自动聚类模式作为界面显示模式,可选地,具有自动聚类功能的区域界面可以是主界面或者又一屏界面,本申请对此不作限定。After determining the area interface where the target icon area is located, the smart terminal can determine the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located. The interface display mode can be a split-screen display mode, a lock screen display mode, or a negative one-screen display mode Or an automatic clustering mode, etc., which are not limited in this application. Optionally, if the display screen used to display the target icon area includes at least two split-screen display areas, the smart terminal may use the split-screen display mode as the interface display mode; if the target icon area is an icon area on the lock screen interface, That is to say, if the area interface where the target icon area is located is the lock screen interface, then the smart terminal can use the lock screen display mode as the interface display mode; If the area interface of the target icon area is a negative one-screen interface, then the smart terminal can use the negative one-screen mode as the interface display mode; if the area interface where the target icon area is located has an automatic clustering function for the icons on the display screen, the automatic clustering function It can refer to moving each icon in the display screen to the matching icon area, then the smart terminal can use the automatic clustering mode as the interface display mode. Optionally, the area interface with the automatic clustering function can be the main interface or Another screen interface, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,智能终端可确定智能终端的目标主题模式;并将目标主题模式作为目标显示模式。上述目标主题模式可以是会议模式、飞行模式、骑行模式或者户外模式等,本申请对此不作限定。根据目标主题模式,智能终端可以确定与目标主题模式匹配的图标。可选地,若智能终端的目标主题模式为会议模式,那么智能终端可以将与会议相关的应用对应的图标作为与会议模式匹配的图标,与会议相关的应用如文件管理、电子邮件等应用;若智能终端的目标主题模式为飞行模式,那么智能终端可以将与飞行相关的应用对应的图标作为与飞行模式匹配的图标,即可以将不需联网的应用对应的图标作为与飞行模式匹配的图标,如计算器、图库等应用对应的图标;若智能终端的主题模式为骑行模式,那么智能终端可以将与骑行相关的应用对应的图标作为与骑行模式匹配的图标,如导航、时钟等应用对应的图标;若智能终端的目标主题模式为户外模式,那么智能终端可以将与户外相关的应用对应的图标作为与户外模式匹配的图标,如导航、指南针等应用对应的图标。Optionally, the smart terminal may determine the target theme mode of the smart terminal; and use the target theme mode as the target display mode. The aforementioned target theme mode may be a meeting mode, an airplane mode, a riding mode, or an outdoor mode, which is not limited in this application. According to the target theme pattern, the smart terminal can determine the icon matching the target theme pattern. Optionally, if the target theme mode of the smart terminal is the meeting mode, then the smart terminal may use icons corresponding to meeting-related applications as icons matching the meeting mode, and meeting-related applications such as file management, e-mail and other applications; If the target theme mode of the smart terminal is flight mode, then the smart terminal can use icons corresponding to flight-related applications as icons matching the flight mode, that is, icons corresponding to applications that do not need to be connected to the Internet can be used as icons matching the flight mode , such as icons corresponding to applications such as calculator and gallery; if the theme mode of the smart terminal is riding mode, then the smart terminal can use icons corresponding to riding-related applications as icons matching the riding mode, such as navigation, clock If the target theme mode of the smart terminal is the outdoor mode, then the smart terminal can use icons corresponding to outdoor-related applications as icons matching the outdoor mode, such as icons corresponding to applications such as navigation and compass.
可选地,智能终端可以获取目标图标区域中的各个图标所对应应用的应用属性信息,并根据应用属性信息确定目标图标区域中与目标主题模式匹配的图标。可选地,假设目标图标区域包含图标A、B以及C,且图标A和图标B所对应应用的应用属性信息为“会议”,图标C所对应应用的应用属性信息为“骑行”和“户外”,那么当目标主题模式为会议模式时,智能终端可以将图标A和图标B作为与目标主题模式匹配的图标,当目标主题模式为骑行模式或者户外模式时,智能终端可以将图标C作为与目标主题模式匹配的图标。同理,智能终端还可以获取目标图标区域中的各个图标对应的标签信息,并根据标签信息确定目标图标区域中与目标主题模式匹配的图标,该标签信息可以是“会议”或者“骑行”等。本申请对应用属性信息或者标签信息的具体内容不作限定。Optionally, the smart terminal may acquire application attribute information of applications corresponding to icons in the target icon area, and determine icons in the target icon area that match the target theme pattern according to the application attribute information. Optionally, assume that the target icon area contains icons A, B, and C, and the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon A and icon B is "meeting", and the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon C is "ride" and " Outdoor", then when the target theme mode is meeting mode, the smart terminal can use icon A and icon B as the icons matching the target theme mode; when the target theme mode is cycling mode or outdoor mode, the smart terminal can set icon C As an icon matching the target theme pattern. Similarly, the smart terminal can also obtain the label information corresponding to each icon in the target icon area, and determine the icon in the target icon area that matches the target theme pattern according to the label information. The label information can be "meeting" or "ride". wait. This application does not limit the specific content of the application attribute information or tag information.
可选地,智能终端可以将预设主题模式作为目标主题模式,该预设主题模式可以为会议模式、飞行模式、骑行模式或者户外模式等,且预设主题模式可以是智能终端设置的,也可以是用户按照意愿设置的,本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, the smart terminal can use the preset theme mode as the target theme mode, the preset theme mode can be a meeting mode, flight mode, riding mode or outdoor mode, etc., and the preset theme mode can be set by the smart terminal, It may also be set by the user according to wishes, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,智能终端可以显示包含的所有主题模式,用户可以在显示的所有主题模式中执行主题模式选择操作,那么智能终端可以将主题模式选择操作所选中的主题模式作为目标主题模式。可选地,智能终端的设置界面可以包括主题模式设置选项,用户可以在设置界面对主题模式设置选项执行点击操作,那么智能终端可以响应用户执行的点击操作,显示主题模式编辑界面,主题模式编辑界面可以显示智能终端包括的所有主题模式,若用户对主题编辑界面中的任一主题模式执行了主题模式选择操作,那么智能终端可以将主题模式选择操作所选中的主题模式作为目标主题模式。可选地,智能终端的通知栏中可以显示智能终端包含的所有主题模式,如果用户在通知栏进行了主题模式选择操作,那么智能终端可以将主题模式选择操作所选中的主题模式作为目标主题模式;或者,智能终端的通知栏中可以包括主题模式设置选项,如果用户对主题模式设置选项进行了点击操作,那么智能终端可以响应用户执行的点击操作,显示主题模式编辑界面,那么智能终端可以根据用户在主题模式编辑界面执行的主题模式选择操作确定目标主题模式。Optionally, the smart terminal can display all the theme modes included, and the user can perform a theme mode selection operation among all the displayed theme modes, and then the smart terminal can use the theme mode selected by the theme mode selection operation as the target theme mode. Optionally, the setting interface of the smart terminal may include theme mode setting options, and the user can perform a click operation on the theme mode setting options on the setting interface, and then the smart terminal can respond to the click operation performed by the user and display the theme mode editing interface. The interface can display all the theme modes included in the smart terminal. If the user performs a theme mode selection operation on any theme mode in the theme editing interface, the smart terminal can use the theme mode selected by the theme mode selection operation as the target theme mode. Optionally, all the theme modes contained in the smart terminal may be displayed in the notification bar of the smart terminal. If the user performs a theme mode selection operation in the notification bar, the smart terminal may use the theme mode selected by the theme mode selection operation as the target theme mode or, the notification bar of the smart terminal may include theme mode setting options, if the user clicks on the theme mode setting options, then the smart terminal may respond to the click operation performed by the user and display the theme mode editing interface, then the smart terminal may display the theme mode editing interface according to The theme mode selection operation performed by the user on the theme mode editing interface determines the target theme mode.
S502、按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理。S502. Process the icons in the target icon area according to the target display mode.
当目标显示模式为目标图标区域所处的区域界面的界面显示模式时,智能终端可以按照上述界面显示模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理。可选地,假设用于显示目标图标区域的显示屏幕包括至少两个分屏显示区域,也就是说,目标图标区域所处的区域界面的界面显示模式为分屏显示模式,若目标图标区域位于至少两个分屏显示区域的第一分屏显示区域,当用户对目标图标区域中的第一图标进行点击操作时,智能终端可以响应用户执行的点击操作,启动第一图标,并在至少两个分屏显示区域的第二分屏显示区域中显示第一图标所对应应用的应用界面,其中第一图标为目标图标区域中的任一图标,第一分屏显示区域为至少两个分屏显示区域中的任一分屏显示区域,第二分屏显示区域为至少两个分屏显示区域中除第一分屏显示区域以外的任一分屏显示区域。When the target display mode is the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located, the smart terminal may process the icons in the target icon area according to the above interface display mode. Optionally, it is assumed that the display screen used to display the target icon area includes at least two split-screen display areas, that is, the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located is a split-screen display mode, if the target icon area is located in In the first split-screen display area of the at least two split-screen display areas, when the user clicks on the first icon in the target icon area, the smart terminal can respond to the click operation performed by the user to start the first icon, and at least two The application interface of the application corresponding to the first icon is displayed in the second split-screen display area of the first split-screen display area, wherein the first icon is any icon in the target icon area, and the first split-screen display area is at least two split-screens Any split-screen display area in the display area, the second split-screen display area is any split-screen display area except the first split-screen display area among the at least two split-screen display areas.
当目标显示模式为智能终端的目标主题模式时,智能终端可以按照目标主题模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理。可选地,假设智能终端的目标主题模式为会议模式,那么智能终端可以仅将目标图标区域中与会议模式匹配的图标(即与会议相关的应用对应的图标,与会议相关的应用如文件管理、电子邮件等应用)显示在显示屏幕中;或者,如果用户对目标图标区域中的任一图标进行了任一操作,当且仅当上述任一图标为与会议模式匹配的图标时,智能终端可以响应用户执行的上述任一操作。可选地,当上述任一操作为点击操作时,若上述任一图标与会议模式匹配,那么智能终端可以响应用户执行的点击操作,从而启动上述任一图标所对应的应用,否则,智能终端则不启动上述任一图标所对应的应用。When the target display mode is the target theme mode of the smart terminal, the smart terminal can process the icons in the target icon area according to the target theme mode. Optionally, assuming that the target theme mode of the smart terminal is a meeting mode, the smart terminal can only display icons that match the meeting mode in the target icon area (that is, icons corresponding to applications related to meetings, and applications related to meetings such as file management , e-mail and other applications) are displayed on the display screen; or, if the user performs any operation on any icon in the target icon area, if and only if any of the above-mentioned icons is an icon that matches the conference mode, the smart terminal Can respond to any of the above actions performed by the user. Optionally, when any of the above operations is a click operation, if any of the above icons matches the meeting mode, then the smart terminal can respond to the click operation performed by the user to start the application corresponding to any of the above icons, otherwise, the smart terminal Then the application corresponding to any of the above icons will not be started.
在确定目标图标区域所处的区域界面的界面显示模式后,智能终端可以将确定的界面显示模式作为目标显示模式,从而按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理。After determining the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located, the smart terminal may use the determined interface display mode as the target display mode, so as to process the icons in the target icon area according to the target display mode.
可选地,界面显示模式为分屏显示模式,且用于显示目标图标区域的显示屏幕包括至少两个分屏显示区域,那么智能终端可以于目标图标区域中的第一图标触发第一启动指令,该目标图标区域所处的区域界面为至少两个分屏显示区域中的第一分屏显示区域对应的显示界面,然后智能终端可以响应第一启动指令,启动第一图标对应的应用,并在第二分屏显示区域显示第一图标所对应应用的应用界面,第二分屏显示区域为至少两个分屏显示区域中除第一分屏显示区域以外的任一分屏显示区域。可选地,上述包括至少两个分屏显示区域的显示屏幕可以是折叠屏,一个折叠屏中的显示区域为一个分屏显示区域;或者,在显示屏幕不存在折叠角度,即显示屏幕只呈现一个面时,至少两个分屏显示区域为显示屏幕中的至少两个显示区域,至少两个显示区域在显示屏幕中分屏显示;上述应用界面可以显示第一图标所对应应用的应用菜单,也可以显示第一图标所对应应用的应用内容,本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, the interface display mode is a split-screen display mode, and the display screen used to display the target icon area includes at least two split-screen display areas, then the smart terminal can trigger the first start command on the first icon in the target icon area , the area interface where the target icon area is located is the display interface corresponding to the first split-screen display area in the at least two split-screen display areas, and then the smart terminal can respond to the first startup instruction, start the application corresponding to the first icon, and The application interface of the application corresponding to the first icon is displayed in the second split-screen display area, and the second split-screen display area is any split-screen display area except the first split-screen display area among the at least two split-screen display areas. Optionally, the above-mentioned display screen including at least two split-screen display areas may be a folding screen, and the display area in one folding screen is a split-screen display area; or, there is no folding angle on the display screen, that is, the display screen only presents For one surface, the at least two split-screen display areas are at least two display areas in the display screen, and the at least two display areas are displayed in split screens in the display screen; the above-mentioned application interface can display the application menu of the application corresponding to the first icon, The application content of the application corresponding to the first icon may also be displayed, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,如果用户对处于第一分屏显示区域的目标图标区域中的第一图标进行了第一启动操作,那么智能终端可以于目标图标区域中的第一图标触发第一启动指令。可选地,第一启动操作可以是用户对第一图标的点击操作,也可以是用户在第一图标对应的应用编辑菜单执行的应用选择操作。可选地,用户可以长按第一图标,智能终端响应用户的长按操作,显示第一图标对应的应用编辑菜单,该应用编辑菜单包含启动的选项,用户可以对应用编辑菜单中的启动选项执行应用选择操作,从而对第一图标执行第一启动操作。Optionally, if the user performs a first startup operation on the first icon in the target icon area of the first split-screen display area, the smart terminal may trigger the first startup instruction on the first icon in the target icon area. Optionally, the first start operation may be a user's click operation on the first icon, or an application selection operation performed by the user in an application editing menu corresponding to the first icon. Optionally, the user can long press the first icon, and the smart terminal displays the application editing menu corresponding to the first icon in response to the long pressing operation of the user. An application selection operation is performed, thereby performing a first launch operation on the first icon.
可选地,图6a为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图,如图6a所示,显示屏幕包括两个分屏显示区域,分别为分屏显示区域611和分屏显示区域612。如果分屏显示区域611和分屏显示区域612为在显示屏幕中分屏显示的两个显示区域,那么分屏显示区域611和分屏显示区域612对应的显示界面可以均为显示界面610,分屏显示区域611对应于显示界面615中的分屏显示区域616,且分屏显示区域612对应于显示界面615中的分屏显示区域617。可选的,如果显示屏幕为折叠屏, 那么分屏显示区域611和分屏显示区域612对应的显示界面可以为不同显示界面。假设分屏显示区域612中包括图标区域613和图标区域614,图标区域613的区域标识为“游戏”,且图标子区域的数量的4,图标区域614的区域标识为“社交”,且图标子区域的数量为4。以图标区域614作为目标图标区域为例,目标图标区域(即图标区域614)位于第一分屏显示区域(即分屏显示区域612)中,当用户对目标图标区域中的第一图标(图标L)执行点击操作时,智能终端可以于图标L触发第一启动指令,然后智能终端可以响应第一启动指令,启动图标L对应的应用,并在显示界面615中的第二分屏显示区域(即分屏显示区域616)中显示图标L所对应应用的应用界面,也就是说,智能终端可以在显示界面615中的第二分屏显示区域(即分屏显示区域616)中显示第一图标所对应应用的应用界面。Optionally, FIG. 6a is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6a , the display screen includes two split-screen display areas, which are split-screen display area 611 and split-screen display area 612 . If the split-screen display area 611 and the split-screen display area 612 are two display areas displayed in split screens on the display screen, then the display interfaces corresponding to the split-screen display area 611 and the split-screen display area 612 may both be the display interface 610. The screen display area 611 corresponds to the split screen display area 616 in the display interface 615 , and the split screen display area 612 corresponds to the split screen display area 617 in the display interface 615 . Optionally, if the display screen is a folding screen, the display interfaces corresponding to the split-screen display area 611 and the split-screen display area 612 may be different display interfaces. Assuming that the split-screen display area 612 includes an icon area 613 and an icon area 614, the area identification of the icon area 613 is "game", and the number of icon sub-areas is 4, the area identification of the icon area 614 is "social", and the icon sub-area The number of regions is 4. Taking the icon area 614 as the target icon area as an example, the target icon area (i.e. the icon area 614) is located in the first split-screen display area (i.e. the split-screen display area 612). L) When the click operation is performed, the smart terminal can trigger the first startup command on the icon L, and then the smart terminal can respond to the first startup command, start the application corresponding to the icon L, and display the area in the second split screen in the display interface 615 ( That is, the application interface of the application corresponding to the icon L is displayed in the split-screen display area 616), that is, the smart terminal can display the first icon in the second split-screen display area (ie, the split-screen display area 616) in the display interface 615 The application interface of the corresponding application.
可选地,界面显示模式为锁屏显示模式,那么智能终端按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理的具体实施过程可以为:于目标图标区域中的第二图标触发第二启动指令,目标图标区域所处的区域界面为锁屏界面;响应第二启动指令启动第二图标对应的应用;或者,响应第二启动指令显示验证信息输入界面;获取于验证信息输入界面输入的验证信息;若根据验证信息确定第二图标对应的应用满足预设验证条件,则启动第二图标对应的应用;和/或,若根据验证信息确定第二图标对应的应用不满足预设验证条件,则不启动第二图标对应的应用。Optionally, if the interface display mode is the lock screen display mode, then the specific implementation process for the smart terminal to process the icons in the target icon area according to the target display mode may be: the second icon in the target icon area triggers the second start command , the area interface where the target icon area is located is the lock screen interface; respond to the second start command to start the application corresponding to the second icon; or respond to the second start command to display the verification information input interface; obtain the verification information input in the verification information input interface ; If it is determined according to the verification information that the application corresponding to the second icon satisfies the preset verification condition, start the application corresponding to the second icon; and/or, if it is determined according to the verification information that the application corresponding to the second icon does not meet the preset verification condition, then The application corresponding to the second icon is not started.
可选地,如果用户对处于锁屏界面的目标图标区域中的第二图标进行了第二启动操作,那么智能终端可以于目标图标区域中的第二图标触发第二启动指令。可选地,第二启动操作可以是用户对第二图标的点击操作,也可以是用户在第二图标对应的应用编辑菜单执行的应用选择操作,本申请对此不作限定。可选地,用户可以长按第二图标,智能终端响应用户的长按操作,显示第二图标对应的应用编辑菜单,该应用编辑菜单包含启动的选项,用户可以对应用编辑菜单中的启动选项执行应用选择操作,从而对第二图标执行第二启动操作。Optionally, if the user performs a second startup operation on the second icon in the target icon area of the lock screen interface, the smart terminal may trigger the second startup instruction on the second icon in the target icon area. Optionally, the second start operation may be a user's click operation on the second icon, or an application selection operation performed by the user in the application editing menu corresponding to the second icon, which is not limited in this application. Optionally, the user can long press the second icon, and the smart terminal displays the application editing menu corresponding to the second icon in response to the user's long pressing operation. An application selection operation is performed, thereby performing a second launch operation on the second icon.
上述验证信息可以是人脸识别信息、指纹识别信息、密码验证信息等,而上述预设验证条件可以指的是智能终端或者用户设置的验证条件,该预设验证条件可以包括人脸识别信息、指纹识别信息、密码验证信息等,当智能终端获取到的验证信息与预设验证条件中的任一验证条件相匹配时,可以确定上述第二图标对应的应用满足预设验证条件。The above-mentioned verification information may be face recognition information, fingerprint recognition information, password verification information, etc., and the above-mentioned preset verification conditions may refer to verification conditions set by smart terminals or users, and the preset verification conditions may include face recognition information, Fingerprint identification information, password verification information, etc., when the verification information acquired by the smart terminal matches any of the preset verification conditions, it can be determined that the application corresponding to the second icon meets the preset verification conditions.
可选地,图6b为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图,如图6b所示,以显示界面620作为锁屏界面为例,目标图标区域(即图标区域621)所处的区域界面为锁屏界面(即显示界面620),图标区域621的区域标识为“锁屏应用”,且图标子区域的数量为9。以图标L作为目标图标区域中的第二图标为例,当用户对目标图标区域(即图标区域621)中的第二图标(即图标L)进行了点击操作时,智能终端可以于第二图标(即图标L)触发第二启动指令,并响应第二启动指令显示验证信息输入界面(即显示界面622)。当验证信息输入界面所显示的验证信息的输入方式为图形密码输入方式,且用户在验证信息输入界面输入的验证信息为滑动轨迹623所指示的图形密码时,智能终端可以获取滑动轨迹623所指示的图形密码,若根据滑动轨迹623所指示的图形密码可以确定第二图标对应的应用满足预设验证条件,即滑动轨迹623所指示的图形密码与预设验证条件中的任一验证条件相匹配时,智能终端则可以启动第二图标对应的应用,并可以将第二图标所对应应用的应用界面显示在显示界面624中;若根据滑动轨迹623所指示的图形密码可以确定第二图标对应的应用不满足预设验证条件,智能终端则可以不启动第二图标(即图标L)对应的应用。Optionally, FIG. 6b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6b, taking the display interface 620 as the lock screen interface as an example, the area where the target icon area (ie icon area 621) is located The interface is a lock screen interface (that is, the display interface 620 ), the area identifier of the icon area 621 is "lock screen application", and the number of icon sub-areas is nine. Taking the icon L as the second icon in the target icon area as an example, when the user clicks on the second icon (ie icon L) in the target icon area (ie icon area 621), the smart terminal can click on the second icon (ie, the icon L) triggers the second start instruction, and displays the verification information input interface (ie, the display interface 622 ) in response to the second start instruction. When the input method of the verification information displayed on the verification information input interface is a graphic password input method, and the verification information input by the user on the verification information input interface is the graphic password indicated by the sliding track 623, the smart terminal can obtain the password indicated by the sliding track 623. If the graphic password indicated by the sliding track 623 can determine that the application corresponding to the second icon satisfies the preset verification condition, that is, the graphic password indicated by the sliding track 623 matches any of the preset verification conditions. , the smart terminal can start the application corresponding to the second icon, and can display the application interface of the application corresponding to the second icon on the display interface 624; If the application does not satisfy the preset verification condition, the smart terminal may not start the application corresponding to the second icon (ie, the icon L).
可选地,智能终端可以于第一图标集中的至少一个图标触发锁屏指令,然后响应锁屏指令,在至少一个图标中确定满足预设锁屏显示条件的第三图标,并将第三图标移动至目标图标区域中。可选地,如果用户对第一图标集中的至少一个图标进行了锁屏操作,那么智能终端可以于第一图标集中的至少一个图标触发锁屏指令,其中锁屏操作可以是用户对第一图标集中的至少一个图标的图标选择操作,也可以是用户对第一图标集中的至少一个图标的多点触控操作,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the smart terminal can trigger a screen lock instruction on at least one icon in the first icon set, and then respond to the screen lock instruction, determine a third icon among the at least one icon that meets the preset lock screen display condition, and place the third icon Move to the target icon area. Optionally, if the user performs a screen lock operation on at least one icon in the first icon set, the smart terminal may trigger a screen lock instruction on at least one icon in the first icon set, wherein the screen lock operation may be performed by the user on the first icon The icon selection operation of at least one icon in the set may also be a multi-touch operation of the user on at least one icon in the first set of icons, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
上述第一图标集包含的图标可以是位于显示屏幕中的所有图标区域中的所有图标,也可以是智能终端包含的所有图标,还可以是位于显示屏幕中除所有图标区域包含的图标以外的所有图标,本申请对第一图标集包含的具体图标不作限定。The icons included in the above-mentioned first icon set may be all icons located in all icon areas of the display screen, or all icons contained in the smart terminal, or all icons located in the display screen except for the icons contained in all icon areas. Icons, this application does not limit the specific icons included in the first icon set.
上述预设锁屏显示条件可以指的是标签信息,也可以指的是属性信息,本申请对此不作限定。可选地,当预设显示条件为标签信息,且该标签信息为“满足”,那么智能终端可以根据上述至少一个图标中各个图标对应的标签信息判断上述至少一个图标中的各个图标是否满足预设显示条件,也就是说,智能终端可以将上述至少一个图标中标签信息为“满足”的图标作为第三图标;当预设显示条件为属性信息,且该属性信息为“游戏”和“社交”时,智能终端可以将上述至少一个图标中属性信息为“游戏”或者“社交”的应用对应的图标作为满足预设显示条件的第三图标。可选地,预设显示条件可以是智能 终端设置的,也可以是用户按照意愿设置的,本申请对此不作限定。The aforementioned preset lock screen display conditions may refer to label information or attribute information, which is not limited in this application. Optionally, when the preset display condition is label information, and the label information is "satisfied", then the smart terminal can judge whether each icon of the at least one icon meets the preset requirement according to the label information corresponding to each icon in the at least one icon. The display condition is set, that is to say, the smart terminal can use the icon whose label information is "satisfied" among the above-mentioned at least one icon as the third icon; when the preset display condition is attribute information, and the attribute information is "game" and "social ", the smart terminal may use the icon corresponding to the application whose attribute information is "game" or "social" among the above at least one icon as the third icon that meets the preset display condition. Optionally, the preset display conditions may be set by the smart terminal, or set by the user according to wishes, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,智能终端可以显示锁屏图标编辑界面,锁屏图标编辑界面中包含第一图标集中的所有图标,并在锁屏图标编辑界面对第一图标集中的至少一个图标触发锁屏指令。可选地,用户可以对显示在锁屏界面的目标图标区域执行长按操作,智能终端响应用户执行的长按操作,显示区域编辑菜单,区域编辑菜单中包含锁屏图标编辑选项,如果用户对区域编辑菜单中的锁屏图标编辑选项进行了点击操作,那么智能终端可以响应用户执行的点击操作,显示锁屏图标编辑界面,当用户在锁屏图标编辑界面对第一图标集中的至少一个图标执行锁屏操作时,智能终端可以在锁屏图标编辑界面对第一图标集中的至少一个图标触发锁屏指令。可选地,若智能终端的设置界面包含锁屏图标编辑选项,那么用户可以在设置界面对锁屏图标编辑选项执行点击操作,智能终端可以响应用户执行的点击操作,显示锁屏图标编辑界面,同理,用户可以在锁屏图标编辑界面对上述至少一个图标执行锁屏操作,从而使智能终端可以于上述至少一个图标触发锁屏指令。Optionally, the smart terminal may display a lock screen icon editing interface, which includes all icons in the first icon set, and triggers a lock screen instruction for at least one icon in the first icon set on the lock screen icon editing interface. Optionally, the user can perform a long press operation on the target icon area displayed on the lock screen interface, and the smart terminal responds to the long press operation performed by the user to display the area edit menu, which includes the lock screen icon edit option. If the lock screen icon editing option in the area editing menu is clicked, the smart terminal can respond to the user's click operation and display the lock screen icon editing interface. When the user selects at least one icon in the first icon set on the lock screen icon editing interface When performing a screen lock operation, the smart terminal may trigger a screen lock instruction for at least one icon in the first icon set on the screen lock icon editing interface. Optionally, if the setting interface of the smart terminal includes a lock screen icon editing option, the user can perform a click operation on the lock screen icon editing option in the setting interface, and the smart terminal can respond to the user's click operation and display the lock screen icon editing interface, Similarly, the user can perform a screen lock operation on the at least one icon on the screen lock icon editing interface, so that the smart terminal can trigger a screen lock command on the at least one icon.
可选地,图6c为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图,如图6c所示,假设第一图标集包含图标A、B、C、D、E、F、G、H、N、J、K、L以及M,且将第一图标集中的至少一个图标显示在显示界面625中,也就是说,显示界面625可以为锁屏图标编辑界面,当用户对显示在显示界面625中的图标D、E、F、G、H以及N执行图标选择操作时,也就是说,用户对显示在显示界面625中的第一图标集中的至少一个图标(即图标D、E、F、G、H以及N)执行锁屏操作时,智能终端可以在显示界面625中于第一图标集中的至少一个图标触发锁屏指令。然后智能终端可以响应锁屏指令,在至少一个图标(即图标D、E、F、G、H以及N)中确定满足预设锁屏显示条件的第三图标,假设至少一个图标中的图标D、E、F、G以及N满足预设锁屏显示条件,那么智能终端可以将图标D、E、F、G以及N作为第三图标,以显示界面626作为锁屏界面为例,那么智能终端可以将图标区域627作为目标图标区域,并将第三图标(即图标D、E、F、G以及N)移动至目标图标区域(即图标区域627)中。Optionally, FIG. 6c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6c, it is assumed that the first icon set includes icons A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, N , J, K, L, and M, and display at least one icon in the first icon set on the display interface 625, that is to say, the display interface 625 can be an interface for editing lock screen icons. When the icons D, E, F, G, H and N perform an icon selection operation, that is to say, the user selects at least one icon in the first icon set displayed in the display interface 625 (ie, icons D, E, F, G , H, and N) When performing a screen lock operation, the smart terminal can trigger a screen lock instruction on at least one icon in the first icon set in the display interface 625 . Then the smart terminal can respond to the lock screen instruction, and determine the third icon that meets the preset lock screen display conditions among at least one icon (ie icons D, E, F, G, H, and N), assuming that the icon D in the at least one icon , E, F, G, and N meet the preset lock screen display conditions, then the smart terminal can use icons D, E, F, G, and N as the third icon, and take the display interface 626 as the lock screen interface as an example, then the smart terminal The icon area 627 can be used as the target icon area, and the third icon (ie icons D, E, F, G and N) can be moved into the target icon area (ie icon area 627 ).
可选地,智能终端可以于目标图标区域触发图标区域滑动指令,确定图标区域滑动指令所输入的滑动轨迹,然后将滑动轨迹的终点位置所处区域界面的界面显示模式作为更新后的目标显示模式,并按照更新后的目标显示模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理。可选地,如果用户对目标图标区域进行了图标区域滑动操作,那么智能终端可以于目标图标区域触发图标区域滑动指令。Optionally, the smart terminal can trigger the icon area sliding command in the target icon area, determine the sliding track input by the icon area sliding command, and then use the interface display mode of the area interface where the end position of the sliding track is located as the updated target display mode , and process the icons in the target icon area according to the updated target display mode. Optionally, if the user performs an icon area sliding operation on the target icon area, the smart terminal may trigger an icon area sliding instruction on the target icon area.
可选地,用户可以对目标图标区域执行长按操作,智能终端响应用户执行的长按操作,使目标图标区域处于可移动状态,那么用户可以对处于可移动状态的目标图标区域执行图标区域滑动操作,从而使智能终端于目标图标区域触发图标区域滑动指令;用户还可以对目标图标区域执行连续点击操作,智能终端响应用户执行的连续点击操作,使目标图标区域处于可移动状态,同理,用户可以对处于可移动状态的目标图标区域执行图标区域滑动操作,从而使智能终端于目标图标区域触发图标区域滑动指令。Optionally, the user can perform a long press operation on the target icon area, and the smart terminal responds to the long press operation performed by the user to make the target icon area in a movable state, then the user can perform icon area sliding on the target icon area in the movable state operation, so that the smart terminal triggers an icon area sliding command on the target icon area; the user can also perform continuous clicking operations on the target icon area, and the smart terminal responds to the continuous clicking operations performed by the user to make the target icon area in a movable state. Similarly, The user can perform an icon area sliding operation on the movable target icon area, so that the smart terminal triggers an icon area sliding instruction on the target icon area.
可选地,更新后的目标显示模式为负一屏模式,智能终端可以获取目标图标区域中的图标,根据目标图标区域中的图标确定目标应用卡片的尺寸,并按照尺寸生成或确定目标应用卡片,然后将目标图标区域中的图标显示在目标应用卡片中。可选地,智能终端可以根据目标图标区域中的图标的数量,确定目标应用卡片的尺寸,该尺寸可以描述目标应用卡片包含的卡片子区域的数量,以及目标应用卡片包含的卡片子区域的分布方式。可选地,假设目标图标区域中的图标的数量为N,智能终端确定的目标应用卡片的尺寸可以是1*N,也就是说,目标应用卡片可以包含N个卡片子区域,目标应用卡片包含的卡片子区域分布为1行,每行包含N个卡片子区域;智能终端确定的目标应用卡片的尺寸也可以是N*1,也就是说,目标应用卡片可以包含N个卡片子区域,目标应用卡片包含的卡片子区域分布为N行,每行包含1个卡片子区域,可选地,N为正整数,本申请对目标应用卡片的尺寸的具体表现形式不作限定。Optionally, the updated target display mode is negative one screen mode, the smart terminal can acquire the icons in the target icon area, determine the size of the target application card according to the icon in the target icon area, and generate or determine the target application card according to the size , and then display the icon in the target icon area in the target app card. Optionally, the smart terminal can determine the size of the target application card according to the number of icons in the target icon area, and the size can describe the number of card sub-areas contained in the target application card and the distribution of the card sub-areas contained in the target application card Way. Optionally, assuming that the number of icons in the target icon area is N, the size of the target application card determined by the smart terminal may be 1*N, that is, the target application card may include N card sub-areas, and the target application card includes The card sub-areas are distributed in one row, and each row contains N card sub-areas; the size of the target application card determined by the smart terminal can also be N*1, that is, the target application card can contain N card sub-areas, and the target application card can contain N card sub-areas. The card sub-areas contained in the application card are distributed in N rows, and each row contains one card sub-area. Optionally, N is a positive integer. This application does not limit the size of the target application card in a specific form.
可选地,图6d为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图,如图6d所示,以图标区域629作为目标图标区域为例,当用户对目标图标区域(即图标区域629)执行图标区域滑动操作时,智能终端可以于目标图标区域(即图标区域629)触发图标区域滑动指令,假设图标区域滑动指令所输入的滑动轨迹的终点位置所处的区域界面为显示界面630,也就是说,图标区域滑动指令所输入的滑动轨迹的终点位置位于显示界面630中,且显示界面630可以为负一屏界面,那么智能终端可以将负一屏模式作为更新后的目标显示模式,并按照更新后的目标显示模式(即负一屏模式)对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理。智能终端在按照更新后的目标显示模式(即负一屏模式)对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理时,可以获取目标图标区域(即图标区域629)中的图标J、K、L以及M,并根据图标J、K、L以及M确定目标应用卡片的尺寸,也就是说,智能终端可以 根据目标图标区域中的图标的数量确定目标应用卡片的尺寸,由于目标图标区域629中包含的图标的数量为4,那么智能终端可以生成包含4个卡片子区域的目标应用卡片,以显示在显示界面630中的应用卡片631作为目标应用卡片为例,智能终端可以将目标图标区域中的图标(即图标J、K、L以及M)显示在目标应用卡片(即应用卡片631)中。Optionally, FIG. 6d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6d, taking the icon area 629 as the target icon area as an example, when the user executes the During the sliding operation of the icon area, the smart terminal can trigger the icon area sliding command in the target icon area (i.e., the icon area 629), assuming that the area interface where the end position of the sliding track input by the icon area sliding command is located is the display interface 630, that is, In other words, the end position of the sliding track input by the icon area sliding command is located in the display interface 630, and the display interface 630 can be a negative one-screen interface, then the smart terminal can use the negative one-screen mode as the updated target display mode, and follow the The updated target display mode (ie negative one-screen mode) processes the icons in the target icon area. When the smart terminal processes the icons in the target icon area according to the updated target display mode (i.e. negative one screen mode), it can acquire the icons J, K, L and M in the target icon area (i.e. icon area 629), And determine the size of the target application card according to icons J, K, L and M, that is to say, the smart terminal can determine the size of the target application card according to the number of icons in the target icon area, because the icons contained in the target icon area 629 If the number is 4, then the smart terminal can generate a target application card containing 4 card sub-areas. Taking the application card 631 displayed on the display interface 630 as the target application card as an example, the smart terminal can use the icons in the target icon area (i.e. Icons J, K, L, and M) are displayed in the target application card (ie, the application card 631).
可选地,界面显示模式为自动聚类模式,智能终端可以确定第二图标集中的至少一个图标的聚类信息,以及目标图标区域的区域属性信息,并将第二图标集中的第四图标移动至目标图标区域中,第四图标的聚类信息与区域属性信息匹配。上述第二图标集包含的图标可以是位于显示屏幕中除所有图标区域包含的图标以外的所有图标,也可以是智能终端包含的所有图标,还可以是位于显示屏幕中的所有图标区域中的所有图标,本申请对第二图标集包含的具体图标不作限定。Optionally, the interface display mode is an automatic clustering mode, the smart terminal can determine the clustering information of at least one icon in the second icon set, and the area attribute information of the target icon area, and move the fourth icon in the second icon set In the target icon area, the clustering information of the fourth icon matches the area attribute information. The icons contained in the above-mentioned second icon set may be all icons located in the display screen except the icons contained in all icon areas, or all icons contained in the smart terminal, or all icons located in all icon areas of the display screen. Icons, this application does not limit the specific icons included in the second icon set.
上述聚类信息可以是图标的标签信息,如“喜欢”或者“不喜欢”等,也可以是图标所对应应用的应用属性信息,如“游戏”或者“社交”等,而上述区域属性信息可以是目标图标区域的区域标识,如“游戏”或者“社交”等,也可以是目标图标区域的标签信息,如“喜欢”或者“不喜欢”等,本申请对此不作限定。可选地,假设第二图标集中的任一图标的聚类信息为“游戏”,且目标图标区域的区域属性信息为“游戏”,那么上述任一图标的聚类信息与区域属性信息匹配。The above-mentioned clustering information may be label information of icons, such as "like" or "dislike", and may also be application attribute information of the application corresponding to the icon, such as "game" or "social", and the above-mentioned area attribute information may be It is the area identifier of the target icon area, such as "game" or "social", and may also be the label information of the target icon area, such as "like" or "dislike", which is not limited in this application. Optionally, assuming that the clustering information of any icon in the second icon set is "game", and the area attribute information of the target icon area is "game", then the clustering information of any icon matches the area attribute information.
可选地,图6e为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图,如图6e所示,假设第二图标集包括图标A、B、C、D、E、F、G、H、N、J、K、L以及M,智能终端可以将第二图标集中的至少一个图标显示在显示界面632中,当用户在显示界面632执行界面切换操作时,智能终端可以响应用户执行的界面切换操作,得到显示界面633,显示界面633的界面显示模式可以为自动聚类模式,以显示界面633中区域标识“游戏”所标识的图标区域作为目标图标区域为例,假设智能终端确定的目标图标区域的区域属性信息为“游戏”,且第二图标集中的图标J、K、L以及M的聚类信息为“社交”,图标A、C、D、E以及F的聚类信息为“游戏”,图标B、G、H以及N的聚类信息为“视频”,那么智能终端可以将第二图标集中的图标A、C、D、E以及F作为第四图标,并将第四图标(即图标A、C、D、E以及F)移动至目标图标区域(即区域标识“游戏”所标识的图标区域)中。Optionally, FIG. 6e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6e, it is assumed that the second icon set includes icons A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, N , J, K, L, and M, the smart terminal can display at least one icon in the second icon set on the display interface 632, and when the user performs an interface switching operation on the display interface 632, the smart terminal can respond to the interface switching operation performed by the user , to obtain the display interface 633, the interface display mode of the display interface 633 can be an automatic clustering mode, taking the icon area identified by the area identifier "game" in the display interface 633 as the target icon area as an example, assuming that the target icon area determined by the smart terminal The area attribute information of is "game", and the clustering information of icons J, K, L and M in the second icon set is "social", and the clustering information of icons A, C, D, E and F is "game" , the clustering information of icons B, G, H and N is "video", then the smart terminal can use the icons A, C, D, E and F in the second icon set as the fourth icon, and use the fourth icon (i.e. Icons A, C, D, E, and F) move to the target icon area (ie, the icon area identified by the area identifier "game").
在确定智能终端的目标主题模式后,智能终端可以将目标主题模式作为目标显示模式,并按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理,也就是说,智能终端可以按照目标主题模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理。After determining the target theme mode of the smart terminal, the smart terminal can use the target theme mode as the target display mode, and process the icons in the target icon area according to the target display mode. Icons in the icon area are processed.
可选地,智能终端可以确定目标图标区域中与目标显示模式匹配的图标,将确定的图标按预设方式显示。可选地,上述将确定的图标按预设方式显示可以指的是:将确定的图标显示在显示屏幕中或者目标图标区域中,且不显示目标图标区域中除上述确定的图标以外的所有图标;上述将确定的图标按预设方式显示也可以指的是:将确定的图标与目标图标区域中除上述确定的图标进行差异化显示;上述将确定的图标按预设方式显示还可以指的是:将确定的图标显示在预设目标图标区域中,本申请对上述将确定的图标按预设方式显示的具体实施方式不作限定。可选地,上述差异化显示可以指的是亮度差异化显示,也可以指的是标识差异化显示,本申请对此不作限定。可以理解的是,亮度差异化显示可以指的是对确定的图标进行高亮显示,以实现对确定的图标与目标图标区域中除上述确定的图标的差异化显示;标识差异化显示可以指的是通过不同的标识对确定的图标与目标图标区域中除上述确定的图标进行差异化显示,上述标识可以指的是数字或字母等。Optionally, the smart terminal may determine the icon in the target icon area that matches the target display mode, and display the determined icon in a preset manner. Optionally, the above-mentioned displaying the determined icon in a preset manner may refer to: displaying the determined icon on the display screen or in the target icon area, and not displaying all icons in the target icon area except the above-mentioned determined icon ; The above-mentioned displaying the determined icons in a preset manner may also refer to: differentially displaying the determined icons and the icons in the target icon area except the above-mentioned determined icons; the above-mentioned displaying the determined icons in a preset manner may also refer to Yes: display the determined icon in the preset target icon area, and the present application does not limit the specific implementation manner of displaying the determined icon in a preset manner. Optionally, the above-mentioned differential display may refer to a differential display of brightness, or may refer to a differential display of a logo, which is not limited in this application. It can be understood that the differentiated display of brightness may refer to highlighting the determined icon, so as to realize the differentiated display of the determined icon and the icon other than the above determined icon in the target icon area; the differentiated display of the logo may refer to Differentially displaying the determined icons and the determined icons in the target icon area through different identifications, where the identifications may refer to numbers or letters.
可选地,上述预设目标图标区域可以指的是最近生成的图标区域(即生成时间与当前系统时间的差值小于预设时长的图标区域),也可以指的是历史图标区域(即生成时间与当前系统时间的差值等于或大于预设时长的图标区域),本申请对此不作限定。可选地,上述预设时长可以是5秒(s)或2分钟(min)等。Optionally, the aforementioned preset target icon area may refer to the most recently generated icon area (that is, the icon area whose difference between the generation time and the current system time is less than the preset duration), or may refer to the historical icon area (that is, the generated The difference between the time and the current system time is equal to or greater than the icon area of the preset duration), which is not limited in this application. Optionally, the above-mentioned preset time length may be 5 seconds (s) or 2 minutes (min) or the like.
可选地,图6f为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图,如图6f所示,显示界面634中包括图标区域635,图标区域635包括图标J、K、L以及M,以图标区域635作为目标图标区域为例,假设目标主题模式为会议模式,图标J和图标M所对应应用的应用属性信息或者对应的标签信息为“户外”,图标K和图标L所对应应用的应用属性信息或者对应的标签信息为“会议”,那么智能终端可以确定目标图标区域中的图标K和图标L为与目标主题模式(即会议模式)匹配的图标,并可以将图标K和图标L显示在显示屏幕中。可选地,智能终端可以将图标K和图标L显示在显示界面636中的图标区域637中的图标子区域中,也可以取消对目标图标区域的显示,并将图标K和图标L显示在空白的图标显示位置上,如图标显示位置638和图标显示位置639,即图标K和图标L未显示在任一图标区域中,换句话说,图标K和图标L直接显示在智能终端的显示屏幕中。Optionally, FIG. 6f is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. Area 635 is taken as an example of the target icon area, assuming that the target theme mode is conference mode, the application attribute information or the corresponding label information of the application corresponding to icon J and icon M is "outdoor", and the application attribute information of the application corresponding to icon K and icon L information or the corresponding label information is "meeting", then the smart terminal can determine that the icon K and icon L in the target icon area are icons that match the target theme mode (that is, the meeting mode), and can display the icon K and icon L on the display screen. Optionally, the smart terminal can display the icon K and the icon L in the icon sub-area of the icon area 637 in the display interface 636, or cancel the display of the target icon area, and display the icon K and the icon L in a blank space. Icon display positions, such as icon display position 638 and icon display position 639, that is, icon K and icon L are not displayed in any icon area, in other words, icon K and icon L are directly displayed on the display screen of the smart terminal.
可选地,智能终端可以于目标图标区域中的第五图标触发第三启动指令,若第五图标与目标显示模式匹配,则智能终端可以响应第三启动指令,启动第五图标对应的应用,和/或,若第五图标与目标显示模式不匹配,则智能终端可以不启动第 五图标对应的应用。可选地,如果用户对目标图标区域中的第五图标执行了第三启动操作,那么智能终端可以于目标图标区域中的第五图标触发第三启动指令,其中第五图标为目标图标区域中的任一图标。可选地,第三启动操作可以是用户对第五图标的点击操作,也可以是用户在第五图标对应的应用编辑菜单执行的应用选择操作。可选地,用户可以长按第五图标,智能终端响应用户的长按操作,显示第五图标对应的应用编辑菜单,该应用编辑菜单包含启动的选项,用户可以对应用编辑菜单中的启动选项执行应用选择操作,从而对第五图标执行第三启动操作。Optionally, the smart terminal can trigger a third startup instruction on the fifth icon in the target icon area, and if the fifth icon matches the target display mode, the smart terminal can respond to the third startup instruction and start the application corresponding to the fifth icon, And/or, if the fifth icon does not match the target display mode, the smart terminal may not start the application corresponding to the fifth icon. Optionally, if the user performs a third start operation on the fifth icon in the target icon area, the smart terminal can trigger a third start instruction on the fifth icon in the target icon area, where the fifth icon is the fifth icon in the target icon area. any of the icons. Optionally, the third starting operation may be a user's click operation on the fifth icon, or an application selection operation performed by the user in an application editing menu corresponding to the fifth icon. Optionally, the user can long press the fifth icon, and the smart terminal responds to the user's long press operation and displays the application editing menu corresponding to the fifth icon. The application editing menu includes options for starting. An application selection operation is performed, thereby performing a third launch operation on the fifth icon.
可选地,图6g为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图,如图6g所示,以显示界面640中区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域作为目标图标区域为例,假设目标主题模式为会议,并将目标主题模式作为目标显示模式,且将图标L作为第五图标,当用户对第五图标(即图标L)执行第三启动操作时,智能终端可以于图标L触发第三启动指令,假设图标L所对应应用的应用属性信息或者对应的标签信息为“会议”,也就是说,图标L与目标显示模式(即会议模式)匹配,那么智能终端可以响应第三启动指令,启动图标L对应的应用,那么智能终端可以将图标L所对应应用的应用界面显示在显示界面641中;假设图标L所对应应用的应用属性信息或者对应的标签信息为“骑行”,也就是说,图标L与目标显示模式(即会议模式)不匹配,那么智能终端可以不启动图标L对应的应用。Optionally, FIG. 6g is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6g, the icon area identified by the area identifier "social" in the display interface 640 is taken as the target icon area as an example, assuming that the target The theme mode is a meeting, and the target theme mode is used as the target display mode, and the icon L is used as the fifth icon. When the user performs the third start operation on the fifth icon (ie icon L), the smart terminal can trigger the second icon L on the icon L. Three start instructions, assuming that the application attribute information of the application corresponding to the icon L or the corresponding label information is "meeting", that is to say, the icon L matches the target display mode (that is, the meeting mode), then the smart terminal can respond to the third start instruction , start the application corresponding to the icon L, then the smart terminal can display the application interface of the application corresponding to the icon L on the display interface 641; assuming that the application attribute information or the corresponding label information of the application corresponding to the icon L is "riding", also That is to say, if the icon L does not match the target display mode (that is, the conference mode), the smart terminal may not start the application corresponding to the icon L.
通过本申请实施例,可以确定目标图标区域以及目标显示模式,该目标显示模式可以是目标图标区域所处区域界面的界面显示模式或者智能终端的目标主题模式,并按照确定的目标显示模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理。如果目标显示模式不同,则可以按照不同的目标显示模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行不同的处理,以实现对目标图标区域中的图标进行多样化的管理和操作的目的。并且,智能终端可以确定目标图标区域所处的区域界面的界面显示模式,并将确定的界面显示模式作为目标显示模式,也就是说,智能终端可以按照确定的界面显示模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理。当确定的界面显示模式不同时,智能终端可以按照确定的界面显示模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行不同的处理,从而对目标图标区域中的图标进行多样化的管理和操作。另外,智能终端可以确定目标主题模式,并将确定的目标主题模式作为目标显示模式,也就是说,智能终端可以按照确定的目标主题模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行处理。当确定的目标主题模式不同时,智能终端可以按照目标主题模式对目标图标区域中的图标进行不同的处理,从而对目标图标区域中的图标进行多样化的管理和操作。Through the embodiment of the present application, the target icon area and the target display mode can be determined. The target display mode can be the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located or the target theme mode of the smart terminal, and the target is displayed according to the determined target display mode. Icons in the icon area are processed. If the target display modes are different, the icons in the target icon area may be processed differently according to the different target display modes, so as to achieve the goal of performing diversified management and operations on the icons in the target icon area. Moreover, the smart terminal can determine the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located, and use the determined interface display mode as the target display mode, that is to say, the smart terminal can follow the determined interface display mode for the target icon area. icon for processing. When the determined interface display modes are different, the smart terminal may process the icons in the target icon area differently according to the determined interface display mode, so as to perform diversified management and operations on the icons in the target icon area. In addition, the smart terminal can determine the target theme mode, and use the determined target theme mode as the target display mode, that is, the smart terminal can process the icons in the target icon area according to the determined target theme mode. When the determined target theme modes are different, the smart terminal may process the icons in the target icon area differently according to the target theme mode, so as to perform diversified management and operations on the icons in the target icon area.
请参见图7所示的实施例,图7为本申请实施例提供的一种图标处理方法的流程示意图,该方法可以应用于移动终端或者固定终端等智能终端,为了便于阐述,本申请实施例以执行主体为移动终端为例进行说明。可选地,本实施例示出的图标处理方法包括:Please refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of an icon processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application. This method can be applied to smart terminals such as mobile terminals or fixed terminals. Take the mobile terminal as an example for description. Optionally, the icon processing method shown in this embodiment includes:
S701、确定目标图标区域,以及目标图标区域对应的目标显示模式。S701. Determine a target icon area and a target display mode corresponding to the target icon area.
移动终端可以包括至少一个图标区域,其中,该至少一个图标区域中的各个图标区域可以指的是大文件夹或者应用卡片等。可以理解的是,移动终端中的图标区域包括至少一个图标子区域,且至少一个图标子区域中的任一图标子区域可以显示该图标区域中的任一图标。可选地,不同图标区域可以具有不同的区域标识,其中不同图标区域的区域标识可以是移动终端设置的,也可以是用户设置的。The mobile terminal may include at least one icon area, wherein each icon area in the at least one icon area may refer to a large folder or an application card or the like. It can be understood that the icon area in the mobile terminal includes at least one icon sub-area, and any icon sub-area in the at least one icon sub-area can display any icon in the icon area. Optionally, different icon areas may have different area identifications, wherein the area identifications of different icon areas may be set by the mobile terminal or by the user.
可选地,图标区域包含的图标可以指的是如下一种或多种:用于指示应用的图标(即应用所对应的图标),用于指示应用功能的图标(可选地收款图标或者扫一扫图标等),用于指示移动终端的功能的图标(可选地手电筒图标或者设置图标等),用于指示内容的图标(可选地通知信息的图标或者会话内容的图标等)。Optionally, the icons contained in the icon area may refer to one or more of the following: an icon used to indicate an application (that is, an icon corresponding to the application), an icon used to indicate an application function (optionally a collection icon or scan icon, etc.), an icon used to indicate the function of the mobile terminal (optionally a flashlight icon or a setting icon, etc.), an icon used to indicate content (optionally an icon for notification information or an icon for conversation content, etc.).
为了便于阐述,后续均以图标区域指的是大文件夹,且图标区域中的图标指的是用于指示应用的图标为例进行说明。可以理解的是,图标区域区别于小文件夹的是:用户可以不展开图标区域,而对显示在该图标区域的图标子区域中的图标或者该图标所对应的应用进行操作。可选地,用户可以在不展开图标区域的情况下,点击显示在该图标区域的各个图标子区域中的任一图标,移动终端可以响应用户的点击操作,启动用户的点击操作所指示的图标所对应的应用。For ease of explanation, the following descriptions will be made by taking the icon area as an example referring to a large folder, and the icon in the icon area as an example for indicating an application. It can be understood that the difference between the icon area and the small folder is that the user can operate the icon displayed in the icon sub-area of the icon area or the application corresponding to the icon without expanding the icon area. Optionally, the user can click any icon displayed in each icon sub-area of the icon area without expanding the icon area, and the mobile terminal can respond to the user's click operation and activate the icon indicated by the user's click operation. corresponding application.
可选地,移动终端可以包括锁定图标区域,用户仅能对该锁定图标区域中的图标执行启动操作,以启动该启动操作所指示的图标对应的程序,如启动该图标对应的应用等。但是,用户不能对该锁定图标区域中的图标执行其他操作,例如移出或者卸载等操作。Optionally, the mobile terminal may include a lock icon area, and the user can only perform a start operation on icons in the lock icon area to start a program corresponding to the icon indicated by the start operation, such as start an application corresponding to the icon. However, the user cannot perform other operations on the icons in the locked icon area, such as operations such as moving out or uninstalling.
可选地,移动终端可以将显示屏幕中的任意图标区域作为目标图标区域。可选地,如果用户对显示屏幕中的图标区域进行了切换操作,那么移动终端可以响应用户的切换操作,并将切换操作所作用的图标区域作为目标图标区域。又如,如果用 户对显示屏幕中的图标区域进行了模式编辑操作,那么移动终端可以响应用户执行的模式编辑操作,显示模式编辑界面,当用户对模式编辑界面执行模式选择操作时,移动终端可以响应用户执行的模式选择操作,并将上述模式编辑操作所作用的图标区域作为目标图标区域。上述切换操作、模式编辑操作以及模式选择操作的具体方式可参见后文描述。可选地,如果用户对多个图标区域进行合并操作,那么移动终端可以响应用户的合并操作,并将合并操作所产生的图标区域作为目标图标区域;可选地,如果用户对多个图标移动操作生成图标区域,那么移动终端可以响应用户的移动操作,并将移动操作所产生的图标区域作为目标图标区域。Optionally, the mobile terminal may use any icon area on the display screen as the target icon area. Optionally, if the user performs a switching operation on the icon area on the display screen, the mobile terminal may respond to the user's switching operation and use the icon area on which the switching operation acts as the target icon area. As another example, if the user performs a mode editing operation on the icon area in the display screen, the mobile terminal may display the mode editing interface in response to the mode editing operation performed by the user, and when the user performs a mode selection operation on the mode editing interface, the mobile terminal may In response to the mode selection operation performed by the user, the icon area on which the above mode editing operation is applied is used as the target icon area. For the specific manners of the above switching operation, mode editing operation and mode selection operation, please refer to the following description. Optionally, if the user performs a merging operation on multiple icon areas, the mobile terminal may respond to the user's merging operation and use the icon area generated by the merging operation as the target icon area; If the operation generates an icon area, then the mobile terminal may respond to the user's movement operation, and use the icon area generated by the movement operation as the target icon area.
可选地,上述目标显示模式可以为预设显示模式集中的任一显示模式,预设显示模式集可以是移动终端设置的,也可以是用户设置的,本申请对预设显示模式集中包含的具体内容不作限定。Optionally, the above-mentioned target display mode may be any display mode in the preset display mode set, and the preset display mode set may be set by the mobile terminal or by the user. The specific content is not limited.
可选地,上述目标显示模式可以包括目标背景信息或目标显示形态,其中目标背景信息可以指的是预设显示模式集中的任一背景信息,目标显示形态可以指的是预设显示模式集中的任一显示形态。可以理解的是,当预设显示模式集包括至少一个背景信息时,目标显示模式可以包括目标背景信息;当预设显示模式集包括至少一个显示形态时,目标显示模式可以包括目标显示形态。可选地,背景信息可以指的是背景颜色或背景图案,可选地,背景信息可以为“背景颜色灰色”、“背景颜色蓝色”或者“背景颜色红色”等;显示形态可以指的是组成图标区域的区域边框的形态,可选地,显示形态可以为“圆形”、“矩形”或者“圆角矩形”等。Optionally, the above-mentioned target display mode may include target background information or target display form, wherein the target background information may refer to any background information in the preset display mode set, and the target display form may refer to any background information in the preset display mode set. any display format. It can be understood that when the preset display mode set includes at least one background information, the target display mode may include the target background information; when the preset display mode set includes at least one display form, the target display mode may include the target display form. Optionally, background information may refer to background color or background pattern. Optionally, background information may be "background color gray", "background color blue" or "background color red" etc.; display form may refer to The shape of the area frame that forms the icon area. Optionally, the display shape can be "circle", "rectangle" or "rounded rectangle".
可选地,目标图标区域对应的显示模式不同时,显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标不完全相同。可选地,假设目标图标区域包括图标A、B、C、D、E以及F,目标图标区域的图标子区域的数量为4,且显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标包括图标A、B、C以及D,假设移动终端将目标图标区域对应的显示模式更新为目标显示模式时,显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标可以包括图标A、D、E以及F。可以理解的是,当移动终端将目标图标区域对应的显示模式切换为目标显示模式时,显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标由图标A、B、C以及D更新为图标A、D、E以及F,即目标图标区域对应的显示模式不同时,显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标不完全相同。Optionally, when the display modes corresponding to the target icon areas are different, the icons displayed in the icon sub-areas of the target icon area are not completely the same. Optionally, assuming that the target icon area includes icons A, B, C, D, E, and F, the number of icon sub-areas in the target icon area is 4, and the icons displayed in the icon sub-areas of the target icon area include icon A , B, C, and D, assuming that the mobile terminal updates the display mode corresponding to the target icon area to the target display mode, the icons displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area may include icons A, D, E, and F. It can be understood that when the mobile terminal switches the display mode corresponding to the target icon area to the target display mode, the icons displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area are updated from icons A, B, C, and D to icons A, D , E and F, that is, when the display modes corresponding to the target icon area are different, the icons displayed in the icon sub-areas of the target icon area are not completely the same.
可选地,移动终端可于目标图标区域触发模式编辑指令,响应模式编辑指令输出模式编辑界面;并于模式编辑界面触发模式选择指令,响应模式选择指令在预设显示模式集中选中显示模式,并将选中的显示模式作为目标显示模式。Optionally, the mobile terminal can trigger a mode editing command in the target icon area, and output a mode editing interface in response to the mode editing command; and trigger a mode selection command on the mode editing interface, and respond to the mode selection command to select a display mode in the preset display mode set, and Use the selected display mode as the target display mode.
上述模式编辑界面包含预设显示模式集中的至少一个显示模式,该预设显示模式集可以包括至少一个背景信息,也可以包括至少一个显示形态,预设显示模式集的具体内容可参见上文描述。The above-mentioned mode editing interface contains at least one display mode in the preset display mode set. The preset display mode set may include at least one background information, and may also include at least one display form. For the specific content of the preset display mode set, please refer to the above description .
可选地,如果用户对目标图标区域进行了模式编辑操作,那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发模式编辑指令,并响应模式编辑指令输出模式编辑界面。Optionally, if the user performs a mode editing operation on the target icon area, the mobile terminal may trigger a mode editing command in the target icon area, and output a mode editing interface in response to the mode editing command.
上述模式编辑操作可以指的是用户对目标图标区域的长按操作,也可以指的是用户对目标图标区域的连续点击操作,本申请对模式编辑操作的具体实施方式不作限定。The above mode editing operation may refer to the user's long-press operation on the target icon area, or may refer to the user's continuous clicking operation on the target icon area. This application does not limit the specific implementation of the mode editing operation.
和/或,于所述目标图标区域触发模式编辑指令,响应所述模式编辑指令确定所述目标显示模式。如用户对目标图标区域进行了模式编辑操作,可选地,模式编辑指令包括手势操作中的至少一种,包括对目标图标区域的大小拖动操作,多指触控操作,滑动操作,响应所述模式编辑操作确定所述目标显示模式。And/or, a mode editing instruction is triggered in the target icon area, and the target display mode is determined in response to the mode editing instruction. If the user performs a mode editing operation on the target icon area, optionally, the mode editing instruction includes at least one of gesture operations, including a drag operation on the target icon area, a multi-finger touch operation, and a sliding operation. The mode editing operation determines the target display mode.
可选地,如图8a所示,以目标图标区域为图标区域811为例,当用户对目标图标区域执行了模式编辑操作时,移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发模式编辑指令,并响应模式编辑指令输出模式编辑界面(即显示界面812),模式编辑界面包含预设显示模式集中的至少一个显示模式。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 8a, taking the target icon area as the icon area 811 as an example, when the user performs a mode editing operation on the target icon area, the mobile terminal may trigger a mode editing command in the target icon area, and respond to the mode editing The instruction outputs a mode editing interface (ie, the display interface 812 ), and the mode editing interface includes at least one display mode in the preset display mode set.
可选地,如果用户对模式编辑界面进行了模式选择操作,那么移动终端可以于模式编辑界面触发模式选择指令,响应模式选择指令在预设显示模式集中选中显示模式,并将选中的显示模式作为目标显示模式,其中模式选择指令所选中的显示模式可以指的是用户执行的模式选择操作所选中的显示模式。Optionally, if the user performs a mode selection operation on the mode editing interface, the mobile terminal may trigger a mode selection command on the mode editing interface, respond to the mode selection command to select a display mode in the preset display mode set, and use the selected display mode as The target display mode, wherein the display mode selected by the mode selection instruction may refer to the display mode selected by the mode selection operation performed by the user.
可选地,上述模式选择操作可以指的是用户对模式编辑界面的点击操作,也就是说,上述选中的显示模式可以指的是用户执行的点击操作所作用的显示模式。上述模式选择操作也可以指的是用户对模式编辑界面的滑动操作,该滑动操作可以将模式编辑界面中包含的任一显示模式滑动至显示模式确定区域,也就是说,上述选中的显示模式可以指的是上述显示模式确定区域中的显示模式。本申请对模式选择操作的具体实施方式不作限定。Optionally, the above-mentioned mode selection operation may refer to the user's click operation on the mode editing interface, that is, the above-mentioned selected display mode may refer to the display mode on which the user performs the click operation. The above-mentioned mode selection operation may also refer to the user's sliding operation on the mode editing interface. This sliding operation can slide any display mode contained in the mode editing interface to the display mode determination area, that is to say, the above-mentioned selected display mode can be Refers to the display mode in the above-mentioned display mode determination area. The present application does not limit the specific implementation manner of the mode selection operation.
可选地,上述目标显示模式可以包括目标背景信息或目标显示形态。可选地,当预设显示模式集中包括至少一个背景信 息时,如果上述模式选择操作所作用的显示模式为预设显示模式集中的任一背景信息,那么目标显示模式可以包括目标背景信息,且该目标背景信息为用户执行的模式选择操作所选中的背景信息。又如,当预设显示模式集中包括至少一个显示形态时,如果上述模式选择操作所作用的显示模式为预设显示模式集中的任一显示形态,那么目标显示模式可以包括目标显示形态,且该目标显示形态为用户执行的模式选择操作所选中的显示形态。Optionally, the above target display mode may include target background information or target display form. Optionally, when the preset display mode set includes at least one piece of background information, if the display mode on which the above-mentioned mode selection operation acts is any background information in the preset display mode set, then the target display mode may include the target background information, and The target background information is the background information selected by the mode selection operation performed by the user. As another example, when the set of preset display modes includes at least one display form, if the display mode on which the above-mentioned mode selection operation acts is any display form in the set of preset display modes, then the target display mode may include the target display form, and the The target display form is the display form selected by the mode selection operation performed by the user.
可选地,如图8a所示,以模式编辑界面为显示界面812为例,模式编辑界面包含预设显示模式集中的至少一个显示模式,若用户对模式编辑界面执行了点击操作,也就是说,当用户对模式编辑界面执行了模式选择操作时,移动终端可以于模式编辑界面触发模式选择指令,并响应模式选择指令在预设显示模式集中选中显示模式。假设选中的显示模式为预设显示模式集中的显示形态(即“圆角矩形”),那么移动终端可以将选中的显示模式作为目标显示模式。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 8a, taking the mode editing interface as the display interface 812 as an example, the mode editing interface includes at least one display mode in the preset display mode set. If the user performs a click operation on the mode editing interface, that is to say , when the user performs a mode selection operation on the mode editing interface, the mobile terminal can trigger a mode selection command on the mode editing interface, and respond to the mode selection command to select a display mode from the preset display mode set. Assuming that the selected display mode is a display form in the preset display mode set (that is, "rounded rectangle"), then the mobile terminal may use the selected display mode as the target display mode.
可选地,移动终端可于目标图标区域触发切换指令;并将切换指令所指示的显示模式作为目标显示模式。可选地,如果用户对目标图标区域进行了切换操作,那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发切换指令。可选地,上述切换操作可以指的是用户对目标图标区域的滑动操作,也可以指的是用户对目标图标区域的连续点击操作,本申请对切换操作的具体实施方式不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may trigger a switching instruction in the target icon area; and use the display mode indicated by the switching instruction as the target display mode. Optionally, if the user performs a switching operation on the target icon area, the mobile terminal may trigger a switching instruction on the target icon area. Optionally, the above switching operation may refer to the user's sliding operation on the target icon area, or may refer to the user's continuous clicking operation on the target icon area. The present application does not limit the specific implementation of the switching operation.
可选地,如图8b所示,显示界面816中包括图标区域817,以目标图标区域为图标区域817为例,若用户对目标图标区域执行了滑动操作,也就是说,若用户对目标图标区域执行了切换操作,那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发切换指令。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 8b, the display interface 816 includes an icon area 817. Taking the target icon area as the icon area 817 as an example, if the user performs a sliding operation on the target icon area, that is, if the user slides the target icon area If the switching operation is performed in the area, then the mobile terminal can trigger the switching instruction in the target icon area.
可选地,目标图标区域包含操作控件,移动终端可以于目标图标区域中的操作控件触发拉动指令或下拉指令,若下拉指令所指示的下拉距离大于预设距离阈值,则于目标图标区域触发切换指令。可选地,如果用户对目标图标区域中的操作控件进行了下拉操作,那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发下拉指令,若下拉指令所指示的下拉距离大于预设距离阈值,则于目标图标区域触发切换指令,其中下拉指令所指示的下拉距离可以指的是下拉操作所指示的下拉距离。上述预设距离阈值可以是移动终端设置的,也可以是用户按照意愿设置的,可选地,预设距离阈值可以为8毫米(mm)或2厘米(cm)等。Optionally, the target icon area includes an operation control, and the mobile terminal can trigger a pull instruction or a pull-down command on the operation control in the target icon area, and if the pull-down distance indicated by the pull-down command is greater than a preset distance threshold, trigger switching in the target icon area instruction. Optionally, if the user performs a pull-down operation on the operation control in the target icon area, then the mobile terminal can trigger a pull-down command in the target icon area, and if the pull-down distance indicated by the pull-down command is greater than the preset distance threshold, then the target icon area A switching instruction is triggered, wherein the pull-down distance indicated by the pull-down instruction may refer to the pull-down distance indicated by the pull-down operation. The above-mentioned preset distance threshold may be set by the mobile terminal, or may be set by the user as desired. Optionally, the preset distance threshold may be 8 millimeters (mm) or 2 centimeters (cm) or the like.
上述操作控件可以指的是下拉把手,也可以指的是处于可拉动状态的按钮,本申请对此不作限定。The above-mentioned operation control may refer to a pull-down handle, or may refer to a button in a pullable state, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,如图8c所示,显示界面820中包括图标区域821,以目标图标区域为图标区域821为例,目标图标区域包含操作控件,当用户对目标图标区域中的操作控件执行下拉操作时,移动终端可以于目标图标区域的操作控件触发下拉指令,假设预设距离阈值为5毫米,且下拉指令所指示的下拉距离为6毫米,也就是说,下拉指令所指示的下拉距离大于预设距离阈值,那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发切换指令。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 8c, the display interface 820 includes an icon area 821. Taking the target icon area as the icon area 821 as an example, the target icon area contains operation controls. When the user performs a pull-down operation on the operation control in the target icon area , the mobile terminal can trigger the pull-down command on the operation control in the target icon area, assuming that the preset distance threshold is 5 mm, and the pull-down distance indicated by the pull-down command is 6 mm, that is to say, the pull-down distance indicated by the pull-down command is greater than the preset distance. If the distance threshold is set, then the mobile terminal can trigger a switching instruction in the target icon area.
可选地,目标图标区域对应的显示模式不相同时,显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标不完全相同。Optionally, when the display modes corresponding to the target icon areas are different, the icons displayed in the icon sub-areas of the target icon area are not completely the same.
可选地,当移动终端响应切换指令,将目标图标区域对应的显示模式切换为目标显示模式时,可以在目标图标区域包含的图标中获取目标图标,其中目标图标与显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标不完全相同,并可以将目标图标显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中。Optionally, when the mobile terminal switches the display mode corresponding to the target icon area to the target display mode in response to the switching instruction, the target icon can be obtained from the icons contained in the target icon area, wherein the target icon is the same as the icon displayed in the target icon area The icons in the subareas are not identical, and the target icon may be displayed in the icon subarea of the target icon area.
可选地,目标显示模式可以包括目标显示内容。当切换指令所指示的显示模式为目标显示内容时,目标显示模式可以包含目标显示内容,该目标显示内容可以为至少一个图标内容。那么移动终端响应切换指令,将目标图标区域对应的显示模式切换为目标显示模式可以理解为:将目标图标区域对应的显示内容切换为目标显示内容。Optionally, the target display mode may include target display content. When the display mode indicated by the switching instruction is the target display content, the target display mode may include the target display content, and the target display content may be at least one icon content. Then, in response to the switching instruction, the mobile terminal switches the display mode corresponding to the target icon area to the target display mode, which may be understood as: switching the display content corresponding to the target icon area to the target display content.
可选地,目标显示模式可以包括目标背景信息。当切换指令所指示的显示模式为目标背景信息时,目标显示模式可以包括目标背景信息,该目标背景信息可以为预设显示模式集中的任一背景信息。那么移动终端响应切换指令,将目标图标区域对应的显示模式切换为目标显示模式可以理解为:将目标图标区域对应的背景信息切换为目标背景信息。Optionally, the object display mode may include object background information. When the display mode indicated by the switching instruction is target background information, the target display mode may include target background information, and the target background information may be any background information in the preset display mode set. Then, in response to the switching instruction, the mobile terminal switches the display mode corresponding to the target icon area to the target display mode, which may be understood as: switching the background information corresponding to the target icon area to the target background information.
可选地,目标显示模式可以包括目标显示形态。当切换指令所指示的显示模式为目标显示形态时,目标显示模式可以包括目标显示形态,该目标显示形态可以是预设显示模式集中的任一显示形态。那么移动终端响应切换指令,将目标图标区域对应的显示模式切换为目标显示模式可以理解为:将目标图标区域对应的显示形态切换为目标显示形态。Optionally, the object display mode may include an object display form. When the display mode indicated by the switching instruction is a target display mode, the target display mode may include a target display mode, and the target display mode may be any display mode in the preset display mode set. Then, in response to the switching instruction, the mobile terminal switches the display mode corresponding to the target icon area to the target display mode, which can be understood as: switching the display form corresponding to the target icon area to the target display form.
S702、按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域进行显示。S702. Display the target icon area according to the target display mode.
可选地,目标显示模式包括目标背景信息,移动终端可以按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域进行显示。可以理解的是,移动终端在按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域进行显示时,可以按照目标背景信息对目标图标区域进行显示,也就是说,移动终端可以将目标图标区域的背景信息更新为目标背景信息。Optionally, the target display mode includes target background information, and the mobile terminal can display the target icon area according to the target display mode. It can be understood that when the mobile terminal displays the target icon area according to the target display mode, it can display the target icon area according to the target background information, that is, the mobile terminal can update the background information of the target icon area to the target background information.
可选地,图8d为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标区域的示意图,826为移动终端的显示界面,显示界面826中包括图 标区域827,以目标图标区域为图标区域827为例,当目标显示模式包括目标背景信息,且该目标背景信息指的是“背景颜色灰色”时,移动终端可以按照目标显示模式(即目标背景信息)对目标图标区域进行显示,从而得到显示界面828。显示界面828中包括显示模式为目标显示模式的目标图标区域(即图标区域829),其中,图标区域829的背景信息为“背景颜色灰色”,也就是说,图标区域829的背景颜色为灰色。Optionally, FIG. 8d is a schematic diagram of another icon area provided by the embodiment of the present application, 826 is a display interface of the mobile terminal, and the display interface 826 includes an icon area 827. The target icon area is the icon area 827 as an example. When When the target display mode includes target background information, and the target background information refers to "background color gray", the mobile terminal can display the target icon area according to the target display mode (ie target background information), thereby obtaining a display interface 828 . The display interface 828 includes a target icon area (i.e. icon area 829) whose display mode is the target display mode, wherein the background information of the icon area 829 is "background color gray", that is, the background color of the icon area 829 is gray.
可选地,目标显示模式包括目标显示形态,移动终端可以按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域进行显示。可以理解的是,移动终端在按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域进行显示时,可以按照目标显示形态对目标图标区域进行显示,也就是说,移动终端可以将目标图标区域的显示形态更新为目标显示形态。Optionally, the target display mode includes a target display form, and the mobile terminal can display the target icon area according to the target display mode. It can be understood that when the mobile terminal displays the target icon area according to the target display mode, it can display the target icon area according to the target display form, that is, the mobile terminal can update the display form of the target icon area to the target display form. form.
可选地,如图8a所示,显示界面812中包括图标区域813,以目标图标区域为图标区域813为例,当目标显示模式包括目标显示形态,且该目标显示形态指的是“圆角矩形”时,移动终端可以按照目标显示模式(即目标显示形态)对目标图标区域,从而得到显示界面814。显示界面814中包括显示模式为目标显示模式的目标图标区域(即图标区域815),图标区域815的显示形态为“圆角矩形”,也就是说,组成图标区域815的区域边框的形态为圆角矩形。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 8a, the display interface 812 includes an icon area 813. Taking the target icon area as the icon area 813 as an example, when the target display mode includes a target display form, and the target display form refers to "rounded corners" When "rectangular", the mobile terminal can display the target icon area according to the target display mode (ie, the target display form), so as to obtain the display interface 814. The display interface 814 includes a target icon area (i.e., the icon area 815) whose display mode is the target display mode, and the display form of the icon area 815 is a "rounded rectangle", that is to say, the shape of the area frame forming the icon area 815 is a circle corner rectangle.
可选地,目标图标区域对应的显示模式不同时,显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标不完全相同的具体实施过程可以为:在目标图标区域所包含的所有图标中获取数量满足第一数量的图标作为目标图标,第一数量为目标图标区域中的所有图标子区域的数量,所述目标图标区域对应的显示模式不相同时,显示在所述目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标不完全相同。基于此,可以将目标图标显示在所述目标图标区域的图标子区域中。Optionally, when the display modes corresponding to the target icon area are different, the specific implementation process that the icons displayed in the icon sub-areas of the target icon area are not completely the same may be as follows: the number of all icons contained in the target icon area satisfies the first A number of icons are used as target icons, the first number is the number of all icon sub-areas in the target icon area, and when the display modes corresponding to the target icon areas are different, the icons displayed in the icon sub-areas of the target icon area The icons are not identical. Based on this, the target icon may be displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area.
可选地,如图8b所示,显示界面816中包括图标区域817,以目标图标区域为图标区域817为例,目标图标区域包含图标J、K、L、M、O、P、Q、R以及S,且目标图标区域包含四个图标子区域,即目标图标区域中的所有图标子区域的数量为4,也就是说,第一数量可以为4,那么移动终端可以在目标图标区域所包含的所有图标中获取数量为4的图标作为目标图标。假设目标图标包括图标O、P、Q以及R,可以理解的是,目标图标与显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标(即图标J、K、L以及M)不完全相同,且移动终端可以将目标图标显示在目标图标区域(即图标区域819)的图标子区域中。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 8b, the display interface 816 includes an icon area 817. Taking the target icon area as the icon area 817 as an example, the target icon area includes icons J, K, L, M, O, P, Q, R And S, and the target icon area contains four icon sub-areas, that is, the number of all icon sub-areas in the target icon area is 4, that is to say, the first number can be 4, then the mobile terminal can be included in the target icon area Get 4 icons from all the icons as the target icon. Assuming that the target icons include icons O, P, Q, and R, it can be understood that the target icons are not exactly the same as the icons (i.e. icons J, K, L, and M) displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area, and the moving The terminal may display the target icon in the icon sub-area of the target icon area (ie icon area 819).
可选地,目标图标区域包括处于锁定状态的图标,且处于锁定状态的图标显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中;在目标图标区域所包含的所有图标中获取数量满足第一数量的图标作为目标图标的具体实施过程可以为:确定第二数量,第二数量为目标图标区域的所有图标子区域中除显示有处于锁定状态的图标的图标子区域以外的其他图标子区域的数量;在目标图标区域所包含的除上述处于锁定状态的图标以外的所有图标中获取数量为第二数量的图标作为目标图标。然后,移动终端可以将目标图标显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中。Optionally, the target icon area includes icons in the locked state, and the icons in the locked state are displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area; among all the icons contained in the target icon area, the icons whose number satisfies the first number are acquired as The specific implementation process of the target icon can be: determine the second quantity, the second quantity is the quantity of other icon subregions except the icon subregion displaying the icon in the locked state in all the icon subregions of the target icon region; Among all the icons included in the icon area except the above-mentioned icons in the locked state, the second number of icons is acquired as the target icon. Then, the mobile terminal can display the target icon in the icon sub-area of the target icon area.
可选地,如图8c所示,显示界面820中包括图标区域821,以目标图标区域为图标区域821为例,目标图标区域包含图标J、K、L、M、O、P、Q、R以及S,且目标图标区域包含四个图标子区域,即目标图标区域的所有图标子区域的数量为4。假设图标L为目标图标区域中处于锁定状态的图标,且处于锁定状态的图标L显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中,也就是说,处于锁定状态的图标的图标子区域的数量为1,那么目标图标区域的所有图标子区域中除显示有处于锁定状态的图标的图标子区域以外的其他图标子区域的数量为3。那么移动终端可以确定第二数量为3,并可以在目标图标区域所包含的除上述处于锁定状态的图标(即图标L)以外的所有图标中获取数量为3的图标作为目标图标,也就是说,移动终端可以在图标J、K、M、O、P、Q、R以及S中获取数量为3的图标作为目标图标。假设目标图标包括图标O、P以及Q,那么移动终端可以将目标图标显示在目标图标区域(即图标区域823)的图标子区域中,可以理解的是,移动终端仍将图标L显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中,且图标L所在的目标图标区域的图标子区域保持不变。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 8c, the display interface 820 includes an icon area 821. Taking the icon area 821 as the target icon area as an example, the target icon area includes icons J, K, L, M, O, P, Q, R and S, and the target icon area includes four icon sub-areas, that is, the number of all icon sub-areas in the target icon area is four. Assuming that the icon L is an icon in the locked state in the target icon area, and the icon L in the locked state is displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area, that is, the number of icon sub-areas of the icon in the locked state is 1, Then, the number of other icon sub-areas in all icon sub-areas of the target icon area except the icon sub-area displaying the icon in the locked state is three. Then the mobile terminal can determine that the second number is 3, and can obtain an icon with a quantity of 3 as the target icon from all icons contained in the target icon area except the above-mentioned icon in the locked state (ie icon L), that is to say , the mobile terminal may acquire 3 icons among the icons J, K, M, O, P, Q, R, and S as target icons. Assuming that the target icon includes icons O, P and Q, the mobile terminal can display the target icon in the icon sub-area of the target icon area (i.e. icon area 823). It can be understood that the mobile terminal still displays the icon L on the target icon In the icon sub-area of the area, and the icon sub-area of the target icon area where the icon L is located remains unchanged.
可选地,所述目标图标区域的数量为至少一个,那么移动终端可以按照目标显示模式对至少一个目标图标区域进行显示。可选地,用户可以在显示屏幕中对多个图标区域进行区域选择操作,移动终端响应用户执行的区域选择操作,将选中的图标区域作为目标图标区域。可选地,上述区域选择操作可以指的是用户在显示屏幕中执行的轨迹生成操作,从而将轨迹生成操作所指示的轨迹内的图标区域作为选中的图标区域;可选地,上述区域选择操作也可以指的是用户在区域选择界面中的选择操作,用户可以在显示屏幕的空白区域执行长按操作,移动终端响应用户执行的长按操作,显示区域选择界面可以包含移动终端中的所有图标区域,那么用户可以在区域选择界面执行选择操作,从而得到选中的图标区域,本申请对区域选择操作的具体实施方式不作限定。Optionally, if the number of the target icon area is at least one, then the mobile terminal may display at least one target icon area according to the target display mode. Optionally, the user can perform an area selection operation on multiple icon areas on the display screen, and the mobile terminal responds to the area selection operation performed by the user and uses the selected icon area as the target icon area. Optionally, the above area selection operation may refer to a trajectory generation operation performed by the user on the display screen, so that the icon area within the track indicated by the trajectory generation operation is used as the selected icon area; optionally, the above area selection operation It can also refer to the user's selection operation in the area selection interface. The user can perform a long press operation on the blank area of the display screen, and the mobile terminal responds to the long press operation performed by the user. The display area selection interface can contain all icons in the mobile terminal area, then the user can perform a selection operation on the area selection interface to obtain the selected icon area. This application does not limit the specific implementation of the area selection operation.
可选地,移动终端可以按照目标显示模式对显示屏幕中的所有图标区域进行显示。举例来说,假设移动终端包括图标区 域A和图标区域B,且目标图标区域为图标区域A,那么在确定目标图标区域对应的目标显示模式后,移动终端可以按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域进行显示,并按照目标显示模式对图标区域B进行显示;可选地,不同目标图标区域的目标显示模式可以相同或不同,用户可以对不同目标图标区域分别编辑或统一编辑,或依系统默认设置目标显示模式显示。Optionally, the mobile terminal may display all icon areas on the display screen according to the target display mode. For example, assuming that the mobile terminal includes an icon area A and an icon area B, and the target icon area is the icon area A, then after determining the target display mode corresponding to the target icon area, the mobile terminal can perform the target icon area according to the target display mode. Display, and display the icon area B according to the target display mode; optionally, the target display modes of different target icon areas can be the same or different, and the user can edit different target icon areas separately or collectively, or set the target according to the system default Display mode display.
可选地,移动终端可以按照目标显示模式对至少一个目标图标区域中的至少一个图标进行显示。可以理解的是,移动终端可以根据目标显示模式确定目标图标区域中图标的图标尺寸、图标形态以及图标颜色等图标参数,从而按照确定的图标尺寸、图标形态以及图标颜色等图标参数对目标图标区域中的至少一个图标进行显示。可选地,如图8a所示,目标图标区域可以指的是图标区域813,且目标显示模式可以指的是“圆角矩形”,那么移动终端可以按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域中的所有图标进行显示,得到显示界面814,显示界面814中的目标图标区域(即图标区域815)中图标的图标形态为“圆角矩形”。Optionally, the mobile terminal may display at least one icon in at least one target icon area according to the target display mode. It can be understood that the mobile terminal can determine the icon parameters such as the icon size, icon shape, and icon color of the icons in the target icon area according to the target display mode, so as to set the target icon area according to the determined icon parameters such as the icon size, icon shape, and icon color. At least one of the icons in will be displayed. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 8a, the target icon area may refer to the icon area 813, and the target display mode may refer to "rounded rectangle", then the mobile terminal may display all objects in the target icon area according to the target display mode. The icon is displayed to obtain a display interface 814, and the icon shape of the icon in the target icon area (ie icon area 815) in the display interface 814 is "rounded rectangle".
可选地,移动终端可以确定至少一个图标,并按照目标显示模式对至少一个图标进行显示,该至少一个图标为目标图标区域包括的所有图标中的一个或多个图标。可选地,移动终端可以将显示在目标图标区域中的图标子区域中的图标作为上述至少一个图标,也可以将用户选中的图标或所有图标作为上述至少一个图标,本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine at least one icon and display the at least one icon according to the target display mode, where the at least one icon is one or more icons among all the icons included in the target icon area. Optionally, the mobile terminal may use the icon displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area as the above at least one icon, or may use the icon or all icons selected by the user as the above at least one icon, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,目标显示模式可以包括目标显示顺序,该目标显示顺序可以指示显示在目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标的顺序,那么移动终端可以按照目标显示顺序对目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标进行显示。可选地,用户可以长按目标图标区域,移动终端响应用户执行的长按操作,显示图标选择界面,图标选择界面包含目标图标区域中的所有图标,那么用户可以在图标选择界面执行选择操作,移动终端响应用户执行的选择操作,将用户执行的第一次选择操作所作用的图标作为目标显示顺序中的第一个图标,将用户执行的第二次选择操作所作用的图标作为目标显示顺序中的第二个图标,直至用户执行的选择操作的次数达到目标图标区域的图标子区域的总数量,或者直至在图标选择界面执行完成操作,从而使移动终端确定目标显示顺序。可选地,用户也可以在图标选择界面执行连续点击操作,移动终端响应用户执行的连续点击操作,将第M次连续点击操作所作用的图标作为目标显示顺序中的第M个图标,M为正整数,且M小于或等于目标图标区域包含的图标子区域的数量,从而使移动终端确定目标显示顺序。本申请对确定目标显示顺序的具体方式不作限定。Optionally, the object display mode may include an object display order, and the object display order may indicate the order of icons displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area, then the mobile terminal may display the icon sub-area of the target icon area in accordance with the target display order icon in the display. Optionally, the user can press and hold the target icon area, and the mobile terminal displays an icon selection interface in response to the long press operation performed by the user. The icon selection interface includes all icons in the target icon area, so the user can perform a selection operation on the icon selection interface, In response to the selection operation performed by the user, the mobile terminal takes the icon on which the user performs the first selection operation as the first icon in the target display sequence, and takes the icon on which the user performs the second selection operation as the target display sequence until the number of selection operations performed by the user reaches the total number of icon sub-regions in the target icon area, or until the operation is completed on the icon selection interface, so that the mobile terminal determines the target display sequence. Optionally, the user can also perform continuous clicking operations on the icon selection interface, and the mobile terminal responds to the continuous clicking operations performed by the user, and uses the icon on the Mth continuous clicking operation as the Mth icon in the target display sequence, where M is is a positive integer, and M is less than or equal to the number of icon sub-areas contained in the target icon area, so that the mobile terminal determines the target display sequence. The present application does not limit the specific manner of determining the target display sequence.
可选地,假设目标图标区域包含图标A、图标B、图标C以及图标D,且移动终端确定的目标显示顺序为图标C、图标A,那么移动终端可以在目标图标区域的第一个图标子区域中显示图标C,并在目标图标区域的第二个图标子区域中显示图标A。Optionally, assuming that the target icon area contains icon A, icon B, icon C, and icon D, and the target display sequence determined by the mobile terminal is icon C, icon A, then the mobile terminal can display the first icon in the target icon area Display icon C in the area and icon A in the second icon subarea of the target icon area.
通过本申请实施例,移动终端可以按照目标显示模式对目标图标区域进行显示,如果目标显示模式不同,那么可以按照不同的目标显示模式对目标图标区域进行显示,从而实现对目标图标区域进行多样性或者趣味性地显示,便于用户按照意愿对目标图标区域对应的显示模式进行调整,以提高用户黏性。并且,移动终端可以显示模式编辑界面,并根据于模式编辑界面触发的模式选择指令,确定目标图标区域对应的目标显示模式,如果模式选择指令所选中的显示模式不同,那么移动终端确定的目标显示模式不同,便于用户按照意愿对目标显示模式进行设置。另外,移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发切换指令,从而将切换指令所指示的显示模式作为目标显示模式,以便于用户对目标图标区域对应的显示模式进行调整。Through the embodiment of the present application, the mobile terminal can display the target icon area according to the target display mode. If the target display modes are different, the target icon area can be displayed according to different target display modes, thereby realizing the diversity of the target icon area. Or display in an interesting way, so that users can adjust the display mode corresponding to the target icon area according to their wishes, so as to improve user stickiness. In addition, the mobile terminal can display the mode editing interface, and determine the target display mode corresponding to the target icon area according to the mode selection instruction triggered on the mode editing interface. If the display modes selected by the mode selection instruction are different, then the target display mode determined by the mobile terminal The modes are different, which is convenient for users to set the target display mode according to their wishes. In addition, the mobile terminal may trigger a switching instruction in the target icon area, so that the display mode indicated by the switching instruction is used as the target display mode, so that the user can adjust the display mode corresponding to the target icon area.
本申请还提供一种智能终端,智能终端包括存储器、处理器,存储器上存储有计算机程序,计算机程序被处理器执行时实现上述任一实施例中的方法的步骤。The present application also provides an intelligent terminal. The intelligent terminal includes a memory and a processor, and a computer program is stored in the memory. When the computer program is executed by the processor, the steps of the method in any of the foregoing embodiments are implemented.
本申请还提供一种计算机存储介质,计算机存储介质上存储有计算机程序,计算机程序被处理器执行时实现上述任一实施例中的方法的步骤。The present application also provides a computer storage medium, on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of the method in any of the foregoing embodiments are implemented.
在本申请提供的智能终端和计算机存储介质的实施例中,可以包含任一上述实施例的全部技术特征,说明书拓展和解释内容与上述方法的各实施例基本相同,在此不做再赘述。The embodiments of the smart terminal and the computer storage medium provided in the present application may include all the technical features of any of the above embodiments, and the expansion and explanation of the description are basically the same as those of the embodiments of the above method, and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码,当计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如上各种可能的实施方式中的方法。An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer program code, and when the computer program code is run on the computer, the computer is made to execute the methods in the above various possible implementation manners.
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片,包括存储器和处理器,存储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有芯片的设备执行如上各种可能的实施方式中的方法。The embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, including a memory and a processor. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the device installed with the chip executes the above various possible implementation modes. Methods.
可以理解,上述场景仅是作为示例,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的应用场景的限定,本申请的技术方案还可应用于其他场景。例如,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着系统架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。It can be understood that the above scenario is only an example, and does not constitute a limitation on the application scenario of the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, and the technical solution of the present application can also be applied to other scenarios. For example, those skilled in the art know that with the evolution of the system architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
上述本申请实施例序号仅仅为了描述,不代表实施例的优劣。The serial numbers of the above embodiments of the present application are for description only, and do not represent the advantages and disadvantages of the embodiments.
本申请实施例方法中的步骤可以根据实际需要进行顺序调整、合并和删减。The steps in the methods of the embodiments of the present application can be adjusted, combined and deleted according to actual needs.
本申请实施例设备中的单元可以根据实际需要进行合并、划分和删减。Units in the device in the embodiment of the present application may be combined, divided and deleted according to actual needs.
在本申请中,对于相同或相似的术语概念、技术方案和/或应用场景描述,一般只在第一次出现时进行详细描述,后面再重复出现时,为了简洁,一般未再重复阐述,在理解本申请技术方案等内容时,对于在后未详细描述的相同或相似的术语概念、技术方案和/或应用场景描述等,可以参考其之前的相关详细描述。In this application, descriptions of the same or similar terms, concepts, technical solutions and/or application scenarios are generally only described in detail when they appear for the first time, and when they appear repeatedly later, for the sake of brevity, they are generally not repeated. When understanding the technical solutions and other contents of the present application, for the same or similar term concepts, technical solutions and/or application scenario descriptions that are not described in detail later, you can refer to the previous relevant detailed descriptions.
在本申请中,对各个实施例的描述都各有侧重,某个实施例中没有详述或记载的部分,可以参见其它实施例的相关描述。In this application, the description of each embodiment has its own emphasis. For the parts that are not detailed or recorded in a certain embodiment, please refer to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments.
本申请技术方案的各技术特征可以进行任意的组合,为使描述简洁,未对上述实施例中的各个技术特征所有可能的组合都进行描述,然而,只要这些技术特征的组合不存在矛盾,都应当认为是本申请记载的范围。The various technical features of the technical solution of the present application can be combined arbitrarily. For the sake of concise description, all possible combinations of the various technical features in the above-mentioned embodiments are not described. However, as long as there is no contradiction in the combination of these technical features, all It should be regarded as the scope described in this application.
通过以上的实施方式的描述,本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到上述实施例方法可借助软件加必需的通用硬件平台的方式来实现,当然也可以通过硬件,但很多情况下前者是更佳的实施方式。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在如上的一个存储介质(如ROM/RAM、磁碟、光盘)中,包括若干指令用以使得一台终端设备(可以是手机,计算机,服务器,被控终端,或者网络设备等)执行本申请每个实施例的方法。Through the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that the methods of the above embodiments can be implemented by means of software plus a necessary general-purpose hardware platform, and of course also by hardware, but in many cases the former is better implementation. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence or in other words, the part that contributes to the prior art, and the computer software product is stored in one of the above storage media (such as ROM/RAM, magnetic CD, CD), including several instructions to make a terminal device (which may be a mobile phone, computer, server, controlled terminal, or network device, etc.) execute the method of each embodiment of the present application.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例的流程或功能。计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络,或者其他可编程装置。计算机指令可以存储在计算机存储介质中,或者从一个计算机存储介质向另一个计算机存储介质传输,例如,计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。计算机存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、存储盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD),或者半导体介质(例如固态存储盘Solid State Disk(SSD))等。In the above embodiments, all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. A computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable apparatus. Computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer storage medium to another, for example, from a website site, computer, server, or data center via wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, Digital Subscriber Line) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center. The computer storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device including a server, a data center, and the like integrated with one or more available media. Usable media may be magnetic media, (eg, floppy disk, memory disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, Solid State Disk (SSD)), among others.
以上仅为本申请的优选实施例,并非因此限制本申请的专利范围,凡是利用本申请说明书及附图内容所作的等效结构或等效流程变换,或直接或间接运用在其他相关的技术领域,均同理包括在本申请的专利保护范围内。The above are only preferred embodiments of the present application, and are not intended to limit the patent scope of the present application. All equivalent structures or equivalent process transformations made by using the description of the application and the accompanying drawings are directly or indirectly used in other related technical fields. , are all included in the patent protection scope of the present application in the same way.

Claims (29)

  1. 一种图标的显示方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括以下步骤:A method for displaying icons, characterized in that the method comprises the following steps:
    S10:确定目标图标区域的目标场景模式;S10: Determine the target scene mode of the target icon area;
    S20:获取所述目标图标区域中的至少一个图标;S20: Acquire at least one icon in the target icon area;
    S30:按照所述目标场景模式生成或确定场景化界面,并在所述场景化界面中显示所述至少一个图标。S30: Generate or determine a scene-based interface according to the target scene mode, and display the at least one icon in the scene-based interface.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括以下步骤:The method according to claim 1, further comprising the steps of:
    按照所述目标场景模式对所述至少一个图标进行形态或参数变化处理,得到所述至少一个图标对应的形态或参数更新后的图标;Performing form or parameter change processing on the at least one icon according to the target scene mode to obtain an updated icon corresponding to the form or parameter of the at least one icon;
    所述在所述场景化界面中显示所述至少一个图标,包括;The displaying the at least one icon in the scene interface includes;
    在所述场景化界面中显示所述至少一个图标对应的形态或参数更新后的图标。An icon corresponding to the at least one icon whose form or parameter has been updated is displayed in the scene-based interface.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述确定目标图标区域的目标场景模式,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein said determining the target scene mode of the target icon area comprises:
    确定所述目标图标区域的区域属性信息;determining area attribute information of the target icon area;
    将场景属性信息与所述区域属性信息匹配的场景模式作为所述目标图标区域的目标场景模式。The scene mode whose scene attribute information matches the area attribute information is used as the target scene mode of the target icon area.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述确定所述目标图标区域的区域属性信息,包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the determining the area attribute information of the target icon area comprises:
    确定所述目标图标区域中的各个图标所对应应用的应用属性信息;Determining application attribute information of the application corresponding to each icon in the target icon area;
    按照所述目标图标区域中的各个图标所对应应用的应用属性信息进行数量累加处理,得到各个应用属性信息对应的图标的数量;Perform quantity accumulation processing according to the application attribute information of the application corresponding to each icon in the target icon area, to obtain the number of icons corresponding to each application attribute information;
    将所述各个应用属性信息中数量满足预设数量条件的应用属性信息作为所述目标图标区域的区域属性信息。The application attribute information whose quantity satisfies a preset quantity condition among the various application attribute information is used as the area attribute information of the target icon area.
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述确定所述目标图标区域的区域属性信息,包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the determining the area attribute information of the target icon area comprises:
    于所述目标图标区域触发区域标识设置指令;triggering an area identification setting instruction in the target icon area;
    响应所述区域标识设置指令,将所述区域标识设置指令所指示的区域标识作为所述目标图标区域的区域属性信息。In response to the region identifier setting instruction, the region identifier indicated by the region identifier setting instruction is used as region attribute information of the target icon region.
  6. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述确定目标图标区域的目标场景模式,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein said determining the target scene mode of the target icon area comprises:
    于所述目标图标区域触发场景模式编辑指令,显示所述场景模式编辑指令所指示的场景模式编辑菜单;triggering a scene mode editing command in the target icon area, and displaying the scene mode editing menu indicated by the scene mode editing command;
    于所述场景模式编辑菜单触发场景模式选择指令,将所述场景模式选择指令选中的场景模式作为所述目标图标区域的目标场景模式。A scene mode selection command is triggered in the scene mode editing menu, and the scene mode selected by the scene mode selection command is used as the target scene mode of the target icon area.
  7. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括以下步骤:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising the steps of:
    确定所述目标图标区域对应的目标显示区域;determining a target display area corresponding to the target icon area;
    所述按照所述目标场景模式生成或确定场景化界面,并在所述场景化界面中显示所述至少一个图标,包括:The generating or determining the scene interface according to the target scene mode, and displaying the at least one icon in the scene interface includes:
    按照所述目标场景模式在所述目标显示区域中生成所述场景化界面,并在所述场景化界面中显示所述至少一个图标。The scene interface is generated in the target display area according to the target scene mode, and the at least one icon is displayed in the scene interface.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标显示区域为所述目标图标区域;所述按照所述目标场景模式在所述目标显示区域中生成所述场景化界面,包括:The method according to claim 7, wherein the target display area is the target icon area; and generating the scene interface in the target display area according to the target scene mode comprises:
    于所述目标图标区域触发显示切换指令;triggering a display switching instruction in the target icon area;
    响应所述显示切换指令,按照所述目标场景模式在所述目标图标区域中生成所述场景化界面。In response to the display switching instruction, the scene interface is generated in the target icon area according to the target scene mode.
  9. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括以下步骤:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising the steps of:
    于所述目标图标区域触发场景化指令;Triggering a scene-based instruction in the target icon area;
    响应所述场景化指令,触发所述按照所述目标场景模式生成或确定场景化界面,并在所述场景化界面中显示所述至少一个图标。In response to the scene-based instruction, triggering the generation or determination of the scene-based interface according to the target scene mode, and displaying the at least one icon in the scene-based interface.
  10. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获取所述目标图标区域中的至少一个图标,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the acquiring at least one icon in the target icon area comprises:
    确定所述目标图标区域中的各个图标所对应应用的应用属性信息;Determining application attribute information of the application corresponding to each icon in the target icon area;
    将所述目标图标区域中的应用属性信息与所述目标场景模式匹配的图标作为所述至少一个图标。An icon whose application attribute information in the target icon area matches the target scene mode is used as the at least one icon.
  11. 一种图标的处理方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括以下步骤:A method for processing icons, characterized in that the method comprises the following steps:
    确定目标图标区域,以及目标显示模式,所述目标显示模式为所述目标图标区域所处区域界面的界面显示模式或智能终端的目标主题模式;Determine the target icon area, and the target display mode, the target display mode is the interface display mode of the area interface where the target icon area is located or the target theme mode of the smart terminal;
    按照所述目标显示模式对所述目标图标区域中的图标进行处理。The icons in the target icon area are processed according to the target display mode.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述确定目标显示模式,包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein said determining the target display mode comprises:
    确定所述目标图标区域所处的区域界面,以及所述区域界面的界面显示模式;Determine the area interface where the target icon area is located, and the interface display mode of the area interface;
    将所述界面显示模式作为所述目标显示模式。The interface display mode is used as the target display mode.
  13. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述界面显示模式为分屏显示模式,用于显示所述目标图标区域的显示屏幕包括至少两个分屏显示区域;所述按照所述目标显示模式对所述目标图标区域中的图标进行处理,包括:The method according to claim 11 or 12, wherein the interface display mode is a split-screen display mode, and the display screen for displaying the target icon area includes at least two split-screen display areas; The target display mode processes the icons in the target icon area, including:
    于所述目标图标区域中的第一图标触发第一启动指令,所述目标图标区域所处的区域界面为所述至少两个分屏显示区域中的第一分屏显示区域对应的显示界面;The first icon in the target icon area triggers a first start instruction, and the area interface where the target icon area is located is the display interface corresponding to the first split-screen display area in the at least two split-screen display areas;
    响应所述第一启动指令,启动所述第一图标对应的应用;In response to the first start instruction, start the application corresponding to the first icon;
    在第二分屏显示区域显示所述第一图标所对应应用的应用界面,所述第二分屏显示区域为所述至少两个分屏显示区域中除所述第一分屏显示区域以外的任一分屏显示区域。The application interface of the application corresponding to the first icon is displayed in the second split-screen display area, and the second split-screen display area is one of the at least two split-screen display areas except the first split-screen display area. Any split-screen display area.
  14. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述界面显示模式为锁屏显示模式;所述按照所述目标显示模式对所述目标图标区域中的图标进行处理,包括:The method according to claim 11 or 12, wherein the interface display mode is a lock screen display mode; the processing of the icons in the target icon area according to the target display mode includes:
    于所述目标图标区域中的第二图标触发第二启动指令,所述目标图标区域所处的区域界面为锁屏界面;The second icon in the target icon area triggers a second start instruction, and the area interface where the target icon area is located is a lock screen interface;
    响应所述第二启动指令启动所述第二图标对应的应用;Start an application corresponding to the second icon in response to the second start instruction;
    或者,or,
    响应所述第二启动指令显示验证信息输入界面;displaying a verification information input interface in response to the second start instruction;
    获取于所述验证信息输入界面输入的验证信息;Obtaining the verification information input on the verification information input interface;
    若根据所述验证信息确定所述第二图标对应的应用满足预设验证条件,则启动所述第二图标对应的应用;If it is determined according to the verification information that the application corresponding to the second icon satisfies a preset verification condition, start the application corresponding to the second icon;
    和/或,and / or,
    若根据所述验证信息确定所述第二图标对应的应用不满足预设验证条件,则不启动所述第二图标对应的应用。If it is determined according to the verification information that the application corresponding to the second icon does not satisfy a preset verification condition, the application corresponding to the second icon is not started.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括以下步骤:The method according to claim 14, further comprising the steps of:
    触发锁屏指令;Trigger the lock screen command;
    响应所述锁屏指令,在所述至少一个图标中确定满足预设锁屏显示条件的第三图标;In response to the lock screen instruction, determine a third icon that satisfies a preset lock screen display condition among the at least one icon;
    将所述第三图标移动至所述目标图标区域中。and moving the third icon into the target icon area.
  16. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括以下步骤:The method according to claim 12, further comprising the steps of:
    于所述目标图标区域触发图标区域滑动指令,确定所述图标区域滑动指令所输入的滑动轨迹;triggering an icon area sliding command in the target icon area, and determining the sliding track input by the icon area sliding command;
    将所述滑动轨迹的终点位置所处区域界面的界面显示模式作为更新后的目标显示模式;Use the interface display mode of the area interface where the end position of the sliding track is located as the updated target display mode;
    按照所述更新后的目标显示模式对所述目标图标区域中的图标进行处理。The icons in the target icon area are processed according to the updated target display mode.
  17. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述界面显示模式为自动聚类模式,所述方法还包括以下步骤:The method according to claim 12, wherein the interface display mode is an automatic clustering mode, and the method further comprises the following steps:
    确定第二图标集中的至少一个图标的聚类信息,以及所述目标图标区域的区域属性信息;determining clustering information of at least one icon in the second icon set, and area attribute information of the target icon area;
    将所述第二图标集中的第四图标移动至所述目标图标区域中,所述第四图标的聚类信息与所述区域属性信息匹配。The fourth icon in the second icon set is moved to the target icon area, and the clustering information of the fourth icon matches the attribute information of the area.
  18. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述确定目标显示模式,包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein said determining the target display mode comprises:
    确定智能终端的目标主题模式;Determine the target theme mode of the smart terminal;
    将所述目标主题模式作为所述目标显示模式。The target theme mode is used as the target display mode.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述按照所述目标显示模式对所述目标图标区域中的图标进行处理,包括:The method according to claim 18, wherein the processing the icons in the target icon area according to the target display mode comprises:
    确定所述目标图标区域中与所述目标显示模式匹配的图标;determining an icon in the target icon area that matches the target display mode;
    将所述确定的图标按预设方式显示。The determined icon is displayed in a preset manner.
  20. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述按照所述目标显示模式对所述目标图标区域中的图标进行处理, 包括:The method according to claim 18, wherein the processing the icons in the target icon area according to the target display mode includes:
    于所述目标图标区域中的第五图标触发第三启动指令;The fifth icon in the target icon area triggers a third activation instruction;
    若所述第五图标与所述目标显示模式匹配,则响应所述第三启动指令,启动所述第五图标对应的应用;If the fifth icon matches the target display mode, in response to the third start instruction, start the application corresponding to the fifth icon;
    和/或,and / or,
    若所述第五图标与所述目标显示模式不匹配,则不启动所述第五图标对应的应用。If the fifth icon does not match the target display mode, the application corresponding to the fifth icon is not started.
  21. 一种图标处理方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括以下步骤:A method for icon processing, characterized in that the method comprises the following steps:
    确定目标图标区域,以及所述目标图标区域对应的目标显示模式;determining a target icon area, and a target display mode corresponding to the target icon area;
    按照所述目标显示模式对所述目标图标区域进行显示。The target icon area is displayed according to the target display mode.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述确定所述目标图标区域对应的目标显示模式,包括以下至少一种:The method according to claim 21, wherein the determining the target display mode corresponding to the target icon area includes at least one of the following:
    于所述目标图标区域触发模式编辑指令,响应所述模式编辑指令输出模式编辑界面,所述模式编辑界面包含预设显示模式集中的至少一个显示模式;于所述模式编辑界面触发模式选择指令,响应所述模式选择指令在所述预设显示模式集中选中显示模式,并将选中的显示模式作为所述目标显示模式;Triggering a mode editing command in the target icon area, outputting a mode editing interface in response to the mode editing command, the mode editing interface including at least one display mode in the preset display mode set; triggering a mode selection command in the mode editing interface, Selecting a display mode in the preset display mode set in response to the mode selection instruction, and using the selected display mode as the target display mode;
    和/或,and / or,
    于所述目标图标区域触发模式编辑指令,响应所述模式编辑指令确定所述目标显示模式。A mode edit command is triggered in the target icon area, and the target display mode is determined in response to the mode edit command.
  23. 根据权利要求21或22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标显示模式包括以下至少一种:目标背景信息,目标显示形态,目标显示内容或目标显示顺序。The method according to claim 21 or 22, wherein the target display mode includes at least one of the following: target background information, target display form, target display content or target display order.
  24. 根据权利要求21或22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述确定所述目标图标区域对应的目标显示模式,包括:The method according to claim 21 or 22, wherein the determining the target display mode corresponding to the target icon area comprises:
    于所述目标图标区域触发切换指令;triggering a switching instruction in the target icon area;
    将所述切换指令所指示的显示模式作为所述目标显示模式。The display mode indicated by the switching instruction is used as the target display mode.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标图标区域包含操作控件;所述于所述目标图标区域触发切换指令,包括:The method according to claim 24, wherein the target icon area includes an operation control; and triggering a switching instruction in the target icon area includes:
    于所述目标图标区域中的操作控件触发拉动指令;triggering a pulling instruction on the operation control in the target icon area;
    于所述目标图标区域触发切换指令。Trigger a switching instruction in the target icon area.
  26. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标图标区域对应的显示模式不相同时,显示在所述目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标不完全相同;和/或,所述目标显示模式包括目标背景信息或目标显示形态。The method according to claim 24, wherein when the display modes corresponding to the target icon areas are different, the icons displayed in the icon sub-areas of the target icon area are not completely the same; and/or, the The target display mode includes target background information or target display form.
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标图标区域对应的显示模式不相同时,显示在所述目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标不完全相同,包括:The method according to claim 26, wherein when the display modes corresponding to the target icon areas are different, the icons displayed in the icon sub-areas of the target icon area are not completely the same, including:
    在所述目标图标区域所包含的图标中获取数量满足第一数量的图标作为目标图标,所述第一数量为所述目标图标区域中的所有图标子区域的数量,所述目标图标区域对应的显示模式不相同时,显示在所述目标图标区域的图标子区域中的图标不完全相同;Among the icons contained in the target icon area, the icons whose number satisfies the first number are acquired as target icons, the first number is the number of all icon sub-areas in the target icon area, and the target icon area corresponds to When the display modes are different, the icons displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area are not exactly the same;
    所述按照所述目标显示模式对所述目标图标区域进行显示,包括:The displaying the target icon area according to the target display mode includes:
    将所述目标图标显示在所述目标图标区域的图标子区域中。Displaying the target icon in an icon sub-area of the target icon area.
  28. 一种智能终端,其特征在于,所述智能终端包括:存储器、处理器,其中,所述存储器上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求1或11或21中任一项方法的步骤。An intelligent terminal, characterized in that the intelligent terminal comprises: a memory and a processor, wherein a computer program is stored in the memory, and when the computer program is executed by the processor, the computer program according to claim 1 or 11 or The steps of any of the methods in 21.
  29. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,所述存储介质上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1或11或21中任一项方法的步骤。A computer storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored on the storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of any one of the methods in claim 1 or 11 or 21 are realized.
PCT/CN2022/100096 2021-09-28 2022-06-21 Icon display method, intelligent terminal and storage medium WO2023050910A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202111144916.0 2021-09-28
CN202111144916.0A CN113867586A (en) 2021-09-28 2021-09-28 Icon display method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
CN202111156522.7A CN113885752A (en) 2021-09-28 2021-09-28 Icon processing method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
CN202111156522.7 2021-09-28
CN202111147514.6 2021-09-28
CN202111147514.6A CN113835586A (en) 2021-09-28 2021-09-28 Icon processing method, intelligent terminal and storage medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023050910A1 true WO2023050910A1 (en) 2023-04-06

Family

ID=85781260

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/100096 WO2023050910A1 (en) 2021-09-28 2022-06-21 Icon display method, intelligent terminal and storage medium

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2023050910A1 (en)

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108984067A (en) * 2018-07-23 2018-12-11 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of display control method and terminal
CN109409070A (en) * 2018-11-01 2019-03-01 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Using open method, device, terminal and storage medium
CN110221737A (en) * 2019-04-29 2019-09-10 东莞市步步高通信软件有限公司 A kind of icon display method and terminal device
CN111831181A (en) * 2020-07-09 2020-10-27 维沃移动通信有限公司 Application switching display method and device and electronic equipment
CN112099682A (en) * 2020-09-02 2020-12-18 维沃移动通信有限公司 Icon display method and device and electronic equipment
CN113835586A (en) * 2021-09-28 2021-12-24 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Icon processing method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
CN113867586A (en) * 2021-09-28 2021-12-31 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Icon display method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
CN113885752A (en) * 2021-09-28 2022-01-04 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Icon processing method, intelligent terminal and storage medium

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108984067A (en) * 2018-07-23 2018-12-11 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of display control method and terminal
CN109409070A (en) * 2018-11-01 2019-03-01 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Using open method, device, terminal and storage medium
CN110221737A (en) * 2019-04-29 2019-09-10 东莞市步步高通信软件有限公司 A kind of icon display method and terminal device
CN111831181A (en) * 2020-07-09 2020-10-27 维沃移动通信有限公司 Application switching display method and device and electronic equipment
CN112099682A (en) * 2020-09-02 2020-12-18 维沃移动通信有限公司 Icon display method and device and electronic equipment
CN113835586A (en) * 2021-09-28 2021-12-24 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Icon processing method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
CN113867586A (en) * 2021-09-28 2021-12-31 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Icon display method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
CN113885752A (en) * 2021-09-28 2022-01-04 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Icon processing method, intelligent terminal and storage medium

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN108037893B (en) Display control method and device of flexible screen and computer readable storage medium
CN109460170B (en) Screen expansion and interaction method, terminal and computer readable storage medium
CN112068744A (en) Interaction method, mobile terminal and storage medium
CN114327189B (en) Operation method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
CN114371803B (en) Operation method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
CN112181233B (en) Message processing method, intelligent terminal and computer readable storage medium
WO2019076377A1 (en) Image viewing method and mobile terminal
CN113422863A (en) Information display method, mobile terminal and readable storage medium
CN112558826A (en) Shortcut operation method, mobile terminal and storage medium
CN112199141A (en) Message processing method, terminal and computer readable storage medium
WO2022267430A1 (en) Screen capture interaction method, and mobile terminal and storage medium
CN114510166B (en) Operation method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
CN113835586A (en) Icon processing method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
WO2023050910A1 (en) Icon display method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
CN113342246A (en) Operation method, mobile terminal and storage medium
CN114595007A (en) Operation method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
WO2023015774A1 (en) Switching method, mobile terminal, and storage medium
CN113885752A (en) Icon processing method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
CN114138144A (en) Control method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
CN114443199A (en) Interface processing method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
WO2023092343A1 (en) Icon area management method, intelligent terminal and storage medium
WO2023050917A1 (en) Icon area management method, and intelligent terminal and storage medium
WO2024045155A1 (en) Icon display control method, mobile terminal, and storage medium
WO2022241695A1 (en) Processing method, mobile terminal, and storage medium
WO2023216682A1 (en) Processing method, intelligent terminal, and storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22874307

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1